RZR XP 1000 2017
RZR XP 1000 2017
Service Manual
FOREWORD
The information printed within this publication includes the latest product information at time of print. The most recent
version of this Service Manual is available in electronic format at www.polarisdealers.com.
This Service Manual is designed primarily for use by certified Polaris Master Service Dealer® technicians in a properly
equipped shop and should be kept available for reference. All references to left and right side of the vehicle are from
the operator's perspective when seated in a normal riding position.
Some procedures outlined in this manual require a sound knowledge of mechanical theory, tool use, and shop
procedures in order to perform the work safely and correctly. Technicians should read the text and be familiar with the
service procedures before starting any repair. Certain procedures require the use of special tools. Use only the proper
tools as specified. If you have any doubt as to your ability to perform any of the procedures outlined in this Service
Manual, contact an authorized dealer for service.
We value your input and appreciate any assistance you can provide in helping make these publications more useful.
Please provide any feedback you may have regarding this manual. Authorized dealers can submit feedback using 'Ask
Polaris'. Click on 'Ask Polaris', and then click on 'Service Manual / Service Literature Question'.
Consumers, please provide your feedback in writing to: Polaris Industries Inc. ATTN: Service Publications Department,
2100 Hwy 55, Medina, MN 55340.
© Copyright 2017 Polaris Industries Inc. All information contained within this publication is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. Due to
constant improvements in the design and quality of production components, some minor discrepancies may result between the actual vehicle and the information
presented in this publication. Depictions and/or procedures in this publication are intended for reference use only. No liability can be accepted for omissions or
inaccuracies. Any reprinting or reuse of the depictions and/or procedures contained within, whether whole or in part, is expressly prohibited. Printed in U.S.A.
SAFETY WARNINGS
Throughout this manual, important information is brought to your attention by the following symbols:
WARNING
SAFETY ALERT WARNING indicates a potential hazard that may result in severe injury or death to the operator,
bystander or person(s) inspecting or servicing the vehicle.
CAUTION
SAFETY ALERT CAUTION indicates a potential hazard that may result in minor personal injury or damage to the
vehicle.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid vehicle damage or property damage.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT provides key reminders during disassembly, assembly and inspection of components.
TRADEMARKS
POLARIS ACKNOWLEDGES THE FOLLOWING PRODUCTS MENTIONED IN THIS MANUAL:
Some Polaris factory publications can be downloaded from www.polarisindustries.com, purchased from
www.purepolaris.com or by contacting the nearest Polaris dealer.
REVISION INDEX
CHAPTER 1 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
MODEL NUMBER DESIGNATION (2015 +) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) DESIGNATION (2015+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
VEHICLE AND ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER LOCATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
REFERENCE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
REPLACEMENT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
PUBLICATION NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
MASTER TORQUE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
2017 RZR XP 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.12
2017 RZR XP 4 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.13
RZR XP 4 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.14
2017 RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.15
RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.16
2017 RZR XP 4 1000 HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17
RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18
2017 RZR XP 1000 LE MATTE GOLD METALLIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.19
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.20
2017 RZR XP 1000 LE (RIDE COMMAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.21
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.22
2018 RZR XP 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.23
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.24
2018 RZR XP 4 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.25
RZR XP 4 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.26
2018 RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.27
RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.28
2018 RZR XP 4 1000 HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.29
RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.30
2018 RZR XP 1000 GOLD METALLIC LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.31
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.32
2018 RZR XP 1000 RIDE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.33
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.34
2018 RZR XP 4 1000 RIDE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.35
RZR XP 4 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.36
MISC. SPECIFICATIONS AND CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.37
CONVERSION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.37
SAE TAP / DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.38
METRIC TAP / DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.38
DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.39
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
MODEL NUMBER DESIGNATION (2015 +)
Example: R15RUE57AC
GROUP MODEL YEAR MAKE / CHASSIS CODE ENGINE CODE REGION OPTION
1st 2nd 3rd 4th* 5th* 6th* 7th* 8th* 9th 10th**
R 1 5 R U E 5 7 A C
* = digits that would transfer to 17 digit VIN and are used in digits 4-8 respectively
** = 10th digit will be used on color/featured versions of models (not including the base)
First 3 digits and 10th digit are used in model number only. They are not used with the 17 digit VIN.
Digits 1 through 8 determine Digital Wrench calibration.
MFG. LOCATION
MODEL YEAR *
CHECK DIGIT
ENGINE SIZE
DRIVELINE
MODIFIER
CHASSIS
CHASSIS
WORLD MFG. ID
INDIVIDUAL SERIAL NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 X A R U E 5 7 3 F G 0 0 0 0 0 0
* Model Year: A = 2010; B = 2011; C = 2012; D = 2013; E = 2014; F = 2015; G= 2016; H=2017; J=2018
REFERENCE INFORMATION
REPLACEMENT KEYS 1
Replacement keys can be made from the original key. To identify which series the key is, take the first two digits on the
original key and refer to the chart to the right for the proper part number.
(i.e. In this example, the first two digits are 31 which would use key blank PN 4110141.
68 4010278
PUBLICATION NUMBERS
YEAR MODEL OWNER’S MANUAL
RZR XP 1000 9927194
RZR XP 1000 LE Gold Metallic 9927195
RZR XP 1000 High Lifter 9927193
RZR XP4 1000 9927194
2017 RZR XP4 1000 High Lifter 9927193
EU / MD
9927410
RZR XP 1000 INT’L ZUG
Tractor 9927412
RZR XP4 1000 INT’L MD 9927410
RZR XP 1000 / LE Gold Metallic / High Lifter 9928358
RZR XP4 1000 / High Lifter 9928358
2018 EU / MD /
9928403
RZR XP 1000 INT’L ZUG
Tractor 9928404
RZR XP4 1000 INT’L MD 9928403
NOTE
When ordering service parts be sure to use the correct parts manual.
Polaris factory publications can be found at www.polaris.com or purchased from www.purepolaris.com.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Special tools may be required while servicing this vehicle. Some of the tools listed or depicted are mandatory, while
other tools may be substituted with a similar tool, if available. Polaris recommends the use of Polaris Special Tools
when servicing any Polaris product. Dealers may order special tools through Polaris’ official tool supplier.
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions:
1-800-345-2233 or http://polaris.service-solutions.com/
PU-50566
Transmission Nut
Socket
Exhaust Pipe to Muffler Fasteners 21 ft-lb (28 Nm) Seat Base to Frame (rear) 30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
Floor Screws 8 ft-lb (11 Nm) Seat Belt Mounting Fasteners 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Flywheel Bolt 133 ft-lbs (180 Nm) Seat Slider Plate Screws 4 ft-lb (5 Nm)
FOX Shock Body Cap 100 ft-lb (135 Nm) Shift Bracket (Gated) 14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
FOX Shock Bearing Assembly 35 ft-lb (47 Nm) Shift Cable Bracket Bolts 17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
14 in-lb (2 Nm) Shock Guard Screws 14 in-lbs (2 Nm)
FOX Shock Bleed Screw
FOX Shock Eyelet 50 ft-lb (68 Nm) Shock Mount (front) 42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
ITEM TORQUE
Stator Cover Screws 9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
Starter Solenoid Cable Fasteners 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
Steering Tilt Shock Fastener 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Steering Pivot Tube Fasteners 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Steering Rack Mounting Bolts 16 ft-lbs (22 Nm)
Steering Shaft to EPS Unit 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
Steering Shaft to Steering Rack 42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
Steering Wheel Nut 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
Thermostat Cover Bolts 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Throttle Pedal Fastener Nuts 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Tie Rod End to Knuckle 30 ft-lb (41 Nm) + 90°
Tie Rod Jam Nuts 14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
Trailing Arm to Frame 70 ft-lb (95 Nm)
Trailing Arm to Bearing Carrier 42 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Fasteners
Trans Bell Crank Nut 18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
Trans Case Screws 20 ft-lbs (27 Nm)
Trans Drain / Fill Plugs 14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
Trans Isolator Bolt (rear) 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Trans Rear Mount Bracket Fasteners 22 ft-lb (30 Nm)
Trans Joint Bracket Bolts 44 ft-lb (60 Nm)
Trans Park Flange Screws 10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Trans Sector Gear Cover 12 ft-lb (16 Nm)
Trans Shift Fork Screws 10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Trans Snorkel Tube Locking Screw 10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Valve Cover Bolts 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
Visor Mounting Screws 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Voltage Regulator Fasteners 5 ft-lb (7 Nm)
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
(Apply Loctite®
Water Pump Impeller
204™ to bolt
threads)
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
(Apply Loctite®
Water Pump Cover Bolts
204™ to bolt
threads)
Wheel Lug Nuts 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2017 RZR XP 1000 1
CATEGORY DIMENSION / CAPACITY
Length 119″ / 302.2 cm
Width 64″ / 162.6 cm
Height 73.75″ / 187.3 cm
Wheel Base 90″ / 228.6 cm
Ground Clearance 13.5″ / 34.3 cm
Dry Weight 1369 lbs. / 621 kg
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P / R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
Front Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
ELECTRICAL Size 29 x 9 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Size 29 x 11 - 14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 16 psi (110 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 16 psi (110 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm
Brake Fluid DOT 4
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET)
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
0-1800 29-75,PM
Fuses 10A EFI (0-6000) (5633720) Black / Red Black
10A Unswitched XP 1000 (7044263) (7044708)
10A Key 1800-3700 29-68,PM
(6000-12000) (5139618 )
10A Term
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
10A Instrument
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P/ R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
Front Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
ELECTRICAL Size 29 x 9 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Size 29 x 11 - 14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 19 psi (131 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 20 psi (138 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm
Brake Fluid DOT 4
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
RZR XP 4 1000 CLUTCH CHART
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET)
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
0-1800 29-75,PM
Fuses 10A EFI (0-6000) (5633720) Black / White
Black
10A Unswitched XP4 1000 lettering
(7044708)
10A Key 1800-3700 29-68,PM (7044504)
(6000-12000) (5139618 )
15A Term
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
10A Instrument
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P/ R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
Front Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
ELECTRICAL Size 29.5 x 9.5 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
Size 29.5 x 9.5 - 14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 18 psi (124 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 18 psi (124 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm
Brake Fluid DOT 4
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET)
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
0-1800 29-70,PM
Fuses 10A EFI (0-6000) (5633321) Black / White
XP 1000 Black
10A Key High Lifter
lettering
(7044709)
10A Term 1800-3700 29-66,PM (7044465)
(6000-12000) (5633496 )
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P / R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
Front Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
ELECTRICAL Size 29.5 x 9.5 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
Size 29.5 x 9.5 - 14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 18 psi (124 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 18 psi (124 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm
Brake Fluid DOT 4
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET)
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
0-1800 29-70,PM
Fuses 10A EFI (0-6000) (5633321) Black / White
XP 1000 Black
10A Key High Lifter
lettering
(7044709)
10A Term 1800-3700 29-66,PM (7044465)
(6000-12000) (5633496 )
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
15A Accessory
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type Gated Shift for Park
P/R/N/L/H
Number of Cylinders 2
Demand Drive Fluid
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Compression Ratio Requirement
10.5:1 (250 mL)
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM AGL
Transmission Lubricant
Engine Max Speed 44 oz
8800 RPM Requirement
(1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm) STEERING / SUSPENSION
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Lubrication Wet Sump Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L)
Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
FUEL SYSTEM Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
Type Bosch ME17 EFI Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank) Adjustment
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa)
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L)
WHEELS / BRAKES
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Front Rim / Size Aluminum Beadlock / 14 x 6
Rear Rim / Size Aluminum Beadlock / 14 x 8
ELECTRICAL Front Tire Make / Model / Pro Armor Crawler XG
Size 30 x 10 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM
Rear Tire Make / Model / Pro Armor Crawler XG
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster Size 30 x 10 - 14
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Front 12 psi (83 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 16 psi (110 kPa)
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System 4 Wheel Hydraulic Disc – Dual
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm Front & Rear Bore Calipers
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr Brake Fluid DOT 4
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis, RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART
EPS
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET) WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
Fuses 10A EFI 0-1800 29-75,PM
10A Unswitched (0-6000) (5633720) Black / Red Black
10A Key XP 1000 (7044263) (7044708)
1800-3700 29-68,PM
10A Term (6000-12000) (5139618 )
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
10A Instrument
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P / R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm with
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Stabilizer Bar
Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
FUEL SYSTEM Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank) Adjustment
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa)
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) WHEELS / BRAKES
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
ELECTRICAL Front Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Size 29 x 9 - 14
Rear Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Size 29 x 11 - 14
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Front 16 psi (110 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 16 psi (110 kPa)
Ignition System ME17 ECU
Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr Brake Fluid DOT 4
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis, RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART
EPS
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan MODEL
ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
METERS (FEET) WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
Fuses 10A EFI
0-1800 29-75,PM
10A Unswitched (0-6000) (5633720) Black / Red Black
10A Key XP 1000 (7044263) (7044708)
10A Term 1800-3700 29-68,PM
(6000-12000) (5139618 )
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
10A Instrument
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P / R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
Front Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
ELECTRICAL Size 29 x 9 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Size 29 x 11 - 14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 16 psi (110 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 16 psi (110 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm
Brake Fluid DOT 4
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET)
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
0-1800 29-75,PM
Fuses 10A EFI (0-6000) (5633720) Black / Red Black
10A Unswitched XP 1000 (7044263) (7044708)
10A Key 1800-3700 29-68,PM
(6000-12000) (5139618 )
10A Term
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
10A Instrument
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P/ R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
Front Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
ELECTRICAL Size 29 x 9 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Size 29 x 11 - 14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 19 psi (131 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 20 psi (138 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm
Brake Fluid DOT 4
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
RZR XP 4 1000 CLUTCH CHART
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET)
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
0-1800 29-75,PM
Fuses 10A EFI (0-6000) (5633720) Black / White
Black
10A Unswitched XP4 1000 lettering
(7044708)
10A Key 1800-3700 29-68,PM (7044504)
(6000-12000) (5139618 )
15A Term
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
10A Instrument
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P/ R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
Front Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
ELECTRICAL Size 29.5 x 9.5 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
Size 29.5 x 9.5 - 14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 18 psi (124 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 18 psi (124 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm
Brake Fluid DOT 4
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET)
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
0-1800 29-70,PM
Fuses 10A EFI (0-6000) (5633321) Black / White
XP 1000 Black
10A Key High Lifter
lettering
(7044709)
10A Term 1800-3700 29-66,PM (7044465)
(6000-12000) (5633496 )
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P / R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
Front Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
ELECTRICAL Size 29.5 x 9.5 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
Size 29.5 x 9.5 - 14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 18 psi (124 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 18 psi (124 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm
Brake Fluid DOT 4
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET)
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
0-1800 29-70,PM
Fuses 10A EFI (0-6000) (5633321) Black / White
XP 1000 Black
10A Key High Lifter
lettering
(7044709)
10A Term 1800-3700 29-66,PM (7044465)
(6000-12000) (5633496 )
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
15A Accessory
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type Gated Shift for Park
P/R/N/L/H
Number of Cylinders 2
Demand Drive Fluid
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Compression Ratio Requirement
10.5:1 (250 mL)
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM AGL
Transmission Lubricant
Engine Max Speed 44 oz
8800 RPM Requirement
(1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm) STEERING / SUSPENSION
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Lubrication Wet Sump Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L)
Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
FUEL SYSTEM Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
Type Bosch ME17 EFI Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank) Adjustment
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa)
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L)
WHEELS / BRAKES
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Front Rim / Size Aluminum Beadlock / 14 x 6
Rear Rim / Size Aluminum Beadlock / 14 x 8
ELECTRICAL Front Tire Make / Model / Pro Armor Crawler XG
Size 30 x 10 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM
Rear Tire Make / Model / Pro Armor Crawler XG
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster Size 30 x 10 - 14
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Front 12 psi (83 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 16 psi (110 kPa)
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System 4 Wheel Hydraulic Disc – Dual
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm Front & Rear Bore Calipers
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr Brake Fluid DOT 4
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis, RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART
EPS
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET) WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
Fuses 10A EFI 0-1800 29-75,PM
10A Unswitched (0-6000) (5633720) Black / Red Black
10A Key XP 1000 (7044263) (7044708)
1800-3700 29-68,PM
10A Term (6000-12000) (5139618 )
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
10A Instrument
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P / R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm with
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Stabilizer Bar
Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
FUEL SYSTEM Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank) Adjustment
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa)
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) WHEELS / BRAKES
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
ELECTRICAL Front Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Size 29 x 9 - 14
Rear Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Size 29 x 11 - 14
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Front 16 psi (110 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 16 psi (110 kPa)
Ignition System ME17 ECU
Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr Brake Fluid DOT 4
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis, RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART
EPS
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan MODEL
ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
METERS (FEET) WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
Fuses 10A EFI
0-1800 29-75,PM
10A Unswitched (0-6000) (5633720) Black / Red Black
10A Key XP 1000 (7044263) (7044708)
10A Term 1800-3700 29-68,PM
(6000-12000) (5139618 )
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
10A Instrument
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform 4-Stroke DOHC Twin Cyl Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Engine Displacement 999cc Shift Type In Line Shift - P/ R / N / L / H
Number of Cylinders 2 Demand Drive Fluid
Front Gearcase Lubricant
8.5 oz
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Requirement
(250 mL)
Compression Ratio 10.5:1
AGL
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Transmission Lubricant
44 oz
Requirement
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM (1300 mL)
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007″ (0.125-0.175 mm)
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011″ (0.229-0.275 mm)
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16″ (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Lubrication Wet Sump Walker Evans™ 2″ Needle
Oil Requirements PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 Shocks
2.5 qt Front Travel 16″ (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity
(2.4 L) Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
Coolant Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L) Walker Evans™ 2.5″ Needle
Shocks
Rear Travel 18″ (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM
Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI
Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 ± 2 PSI (400 ± 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
Front Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
ELECTRICAL Size 29 x 9 - 14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Size 29 x 11 - 14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 19 psi (131 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 20 psi (138 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Ignition System ME17 ECU Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic – Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap NGK MR7F / 0.7-0.8 mm
Brake Fluid DOT 4
Battery / Amp Hr 575 CCA / 44 Amp Hr
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
RZR XP 4 1000 CLUTCH CHART
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET)
Circuit Breaker 25A Cooling Fan WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
0-1800 29-75,PM
Fuses 10A EFI (0-6000) (5633720) Black / White
Black
10A Unswitched XP4 1000 lettering
(7044708)
10A Key 1800-3700 29-68,PM (7044504)
(6000-12000) (5139618 )
15A Term
25A EPS
10A Lights
10A Drive
10A Accessory
10A Instrument
DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS
FRACTION DECIMAL MM TO INCHES FRACTION DECIMAL MM TO INCHES 1
1/64 0.0156″ 33/64 0.5156″
1/32 0.0312″ 1 mm = 0.0394″ 17/32 0.5313″
3/64 0.0469″ 35/64 0.5469″ 14 mm = 0.5512″
1/16 0.0625″ 9/16 0.5625″
5/64 0.0781″ 2 mm = 0.0787″ 37/64 0.5781″ 15 mm = 0.5906″
3/32 0.0938″ 19/32 0.5938″
7/64 0.1094″ 3 mm = 0.1181″ 39/64 0.6094″
1/8 0.1250″ 5/8 0.625″ 16 mm = 0.6299″
9/64 0.1406″ 41/64 0.6406″
5/32 0.1563″ 4 mm = 0.1575″ 21/32 0.6563″ 17 mm = 0.6693″
11/64 0.1719″ 43/64 0.6719″
3/16 0.1875″ 5 mm = 0.1969″ 11/16 0.6875″
13/64 0.2031″ 45/64 0.7031″ 18 mm = 0.7087″
7/32 0.2188″ 23/32 0.7188″
15/64 0.2344″ 6 mm = 0.2362″ 47/64 0.7344″ 19 mm = 0.7480″
1/4 0.25″ 3/4 0.750″
17/64 0.2656″ 7 mm = 0.2756″ 49/64 0.7656″
9/32 0.2813″ 25/32 0.7813″ 20 mm = 0.7874″
19/64 0.2969″ 51/64 0.7969″
5/16 0.3125″ 8 mm = 0.3150″ 13/16 0.8125″ 21 mm = 0.8268″
21/64 0.3281″ 53/64 0.8281″
11/32 0.3438″ 9 mm = 0.3543″ 27/32 0.8438″
23/64 0.3594″ 55/64 0.8594″ 22 mm = 0.8661″
3/8 0.375″ 7/8 0.875″
25/64 0.3906″ 10 mm = 0.3937″ 57/64 0.8906″ 23 mm = 0.9055″
13/32 0.4063″ 29/32 0.9063″
27/64 0.4219″ 11 mm = 0.4331″ 59/64 0.9219″
7/16 0.4375″ 15/16 0.9375″ 24 mm = 0.9449″
29/64 0.4531″ 61/64 0.9531″
15/32 0.4688″ 12 mm = 0.4724″ 31/32 0.9688″ 25 mm = 0.9843″
31/64 0.4844″ 63/64 0.9844″
1/2 0.500″ 13 mm = 0.5118″ 1 1.000″
NOTES
CHAPTER 2
MAINTENANCE
2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
PRE-RIDE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
BREAK-IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
MAINTENANCE QUICK REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.25
GREASE LUBRICATION POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.27
LUBRICANTS / SERVICE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.28
LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.28
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.29
ENGINE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.29
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.30
ENGINE CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.31
ENGINE CYLINDER LEAKDOWN TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.32
VALVE CLEARANCE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.32
CAM CHAIN TENSIONER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.34
HEAT SHIELD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.36
COOLING SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.36
COOLANT STRENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.36
COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.36
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37
COOLING SYSTEM HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37
RADIATOR INSPECTION / CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.38
COOLANT DRAIN / FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.39
FUEL SYSTEM AND AIR INTAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.40
FUEL SYSTEM WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.40
FUEL TANK VENT LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.40
VENT LINE TERMINATION FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.40
FUEL PUMP / FUEL FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.40
FUEL LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.41
THROTTLE PEDAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.42
ENGINE INTAKE PRE-FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.42
AIR FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.42
INTAKE DUCT DRAIN INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.43
PVT / FINAL DRIVE / WHEEL AND TIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.44
BELT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.44
PVT INTAKE PRE-FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.44
PVT DRYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.44
DRIVE SHAFT BOOT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.45
WHEEL AND HUB TORQUE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.45
• Inspect bushings
Front / Rear Suspension • Check for damaged to the control arms / trailing arms
• Check for leaking shocks
NOTE
Service and adjustments are critical. If you’re not
familiar with safe service and adjustment procedures,
have a qualified dealer perform these operations.
BREAK-IN PERIOD
The break-in period consists of the first 25 hours of
operation. Careful treatment of a new engine and drive
components will result in more efficient performance and
longer life for these components.
• Drive vehicle slowly at first while varying the throttle
position. Do not operate at sustained idle.
• Perform regular checks on fluid levels and other areas
outlined on the daily pre-ride inspection checklist.
• Change both the engine oil and filter after 25 hours or
one month.
• See “Owner’s Manual” for additional break-in
information.
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
The maintenance interval charts outline required maintenance and inspection based on vehicle hours / miles. Each
table states the number of hours / miles that service is required on the vehicle. Some items or components may need
to be serviced more often due to severe use, such as operation in water or under severe loads. When the vehicle goes
beyond 500 hours / 5000 miles, return to the 25 hours / 250 mile chart and start the interval process over.
Fuel System Turn key on to pressurize fuel pump; check lines / fittings for leaks and
abrasion
XU / D Parking Brake Cable Adjustment (INT’L) Inspect; adjust tension after first 25 hours
XU Engine Breather Inspect; clean
Battery Check terminals; clean; test
Perform a break-in oil and filter change at 25 hours or one month; perform
XU Engine Oil & Filter Change (Break-In)
every 50 hours or 6 months thereafter
XU Front Gearcase Lubricant Initial fluid level inspection; add lubricant if needed
XU Transmission Lubricant (AGL) Initial fluid level inspection; add lubricant if needed
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
XU - Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
D - Have an authorized Polaris dealer or other qualified person perform these services.
When the vehicle goes beyond 500 hours / 5000 miles, return to the 25 hours / 250 mile chart and start the interval
process over.
* More often under severe use, such as operation in water or under severe loads.
* More often under severe use, such as operation in water or under severe loads.
NOTE
Each item can be purchased separately at your local Polaris dealer.
NOTE
The number count indicated by each part number in the table above indicates the number of units that are shipped
with each order.
ENGINE
ENGINE OIL LEVEL 6. Add the recommended oil as necessary to bring the
This engine has a wet-sump design, meaning the engine oil level within the SAFE range on dipstick. Do not
oil is contained in the bottom of the crankcase. To check overfill (see NOTE below).
the oil level, follow the procedure listed below:
Access the oil dipstick through the opening in front of the 2
passenger rear tire.
Access the oil fill cap through the cargo box access
panel.
Polaris recommends the use of PS-4 Synthetic or PS-4
Extreme Duty Synthetic 4-Cycle Engine Oil.
FLUID CAPACITY
Recommended Engine Oil:
Capacity: 2.5 qt (2.4 L)
PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50 NOTE
Ambient Temp Range: -35° F to 100° F A rising oil level between checks during cold weather
operation can indicate contaminants such as gas or
PS-4 Extreme Duty moisture collecting in the crankcase. If the oil level is
Ambient Temp Range: 0° F to 120° F over the upper mark, change the oil immediately.
1. Position vehicle on a level surface and place the 7. Add engine oil through the oil fill cap w located on
transmission in PARK. top of the valve cover, under the cargo box access
2. Stop the engine and allow it to cool down before panel.
removing the dipstick.
3. Unlock the dipstick lever q. Remove the dipstick and
wipe it dry with a clean cloth.
NOTE
Make certain the dipstick is inserted all the way into the
dipstick tube to keep the depth of the dipstick
consistent.
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER CHANGE 6. Using the Oil Filter Wrench (PU-50105), turn the oil
Always change engine oil and filter at the intervals filter w counter-clockwise to remove it.
outlined in the Periodic Maintenance Chart. Always
change the oil filter whenever changing the engine oil.
The engine oil dipstick is located on the front side of the
engine. Access the dipstick through the engine service
panel.
The engine oil fill cap is located on top of the valve cover.
Access the oil fill cap through the cargo box access
panel.
The crankcase drain plug is located on the bottom of the
crankcase. Access the drain plug through the skid plate
access hole located directly under the crankcase.
1. Position vehicle on a level surface and place the
transmission in PARK.
2. Stop the engine and allow it to cool down.
Oil Filter Wrench:
3. Clean the area around the crankcase drain plug. PU-50105: 2.5″ (64 mm)
NOTE
The sealing surface on the drain plug should be clean
and free of burrs, nicks or scratches.
TORQUE
5. Remove the seats and engine service panel to
access the oil filter. Engine Oil Drain Plug:
12 ft-lbs (16 Nm)
11. Remove oil fill cap (see Chapter 2 – Engine Oil ENGINE CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE
Level, page 2.29). Add the recommended oil as INSPECTION
necessary to bring the oil level to the full mark
(approx 2.5 quarts / 2.4 L). Do NOT overfill! The engine crankcase is equipped with a breather hose.
Inspect the breather hose for possible kinks or wear. The
FLUID CAPACITY hose is form fitted for proper fit.
Recommended Engine Oil: Follow the breather hose q from the crankcase fitting w
to the airbox e.
2
Capacity:
Approx. 2.5 qt (2.4 L)
PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50
Ambient Temp Range: -35° F to 100° F
19. When finished, reinstall the oil fill cap, oil dipstick and
lock the lever.
20. Reinstall the cargo box access panel, engine service
panel and seats.
21. Dispose of used oil and filter properly.
NOTE
Removal of left rear wheel or left rear shock is NOT
necessary to perform this procedure.
6. Remove the four T40 bolts retaining the valve cover. 9. Measure the valve clearance using a feeler gauge.
7. The engine will need to be rotated four times to 10. If the valve clearance is out of specification, see
inspect all eight valve clearances f. Two valves can Chapter 3 – Valve Clearance Adjustment, page 3.81.
be measured at each camshaft lobe position.
MEASUREMENT
Intake Valve Clearance (cold):
.006 ± .002″ (0.15 ± 0.05 mm)
11. Repeat steps 18-20 until all eight valves have been
inspected.
12. If previously removed, apply anti-seize compound to
the spark plug threads and reinstall the spark plugs.
Torque spark plugs to specification.
TORQUE
Spark Plug Torque:
NOTE
7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
Remove spark plugs to aid engine rotation.
13. Inspect the valve cover seal and replace if
8. Rotate the drive clutch counter-clockwise until the necessary.
cam lobes g above the valves you are inspecting
are facing up. 14. Install NEW isolators on the valve cover bolts. Install
the valve cover and the four T40 bolts. Torque bolts
to specification.
TORQUE
Valve Cover Bolts:
7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
15. Install the spark plug wires back into their correct
location.
16. Install the push rivet that retains the heat shield to
the frame cross member.
17. Install the spark plug wires. Ensure wires are 4. Push on the tensioner lock e and manually move the
installed on their proper cylinder spark plug and plunger in and out. It should move freely. If it does not
pushed down all the way so they engage onto the move freely, replace the tensioner assembly.
spark plugs.
NOTE
The engine will misfire if the spark plug wires are
installed incorrectly. The spark plug wires are marked
with PTO and MAG and should be installed to the
corresponding cylinder.
19. Connect the negative (-) battery cable to the battery 5. Retract the plunger all the way in and install into the
and install the seat. cylinder.
20. Start the engine to ensure proper operation.
21. Install the engine access panel.
TORQUE
Tensioner Mounting Bolts:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
COOLING SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM OVERVIEW COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION
The engine coolant level is controlled, or maintained, by The pressure cap q and recovery bottle w are located
the recovery system. The recovery system components under the front hood of the vehicle. The coolant level
are the recovery bottle, radiator filler neck, radiator must be maintained between the minimum and
pressure cap and connecting hose. maximum levels indicated on the recovery bottle.
As coolant operating temperature increases, the
expanding (heated) excess coolant is forced out of the
radiator past the pressure cap and into the recovery
bottle. As engine coolant temperature decreases the
contracting (cooled) coolant is drawn back up from the
tank past the pressure cap and into the radiator.
NOTE
Some coolant level drop on new machines is normal as
the system is purging itself of trapped air. Observe
coolant levels often during break-in period.
Overheating of engine could occur if air is not fully
purged from system.
Polaris Premium 50/50 Antifreeze is premixed and
ready to use. Do not dilute with water.
With the engine at operating temperature, the coolant
level should be between the upper and lower marks on
the coolant recovery bottle. If not, perform the following
COOLANT STRENGTH procedure:
Test the strength of the coolant using an antifreeze 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface.
hydrometer. 2. Remove the front hood.
3. View the coolant level in the recovery bottle.
4. If the coolant level is below the MIN line, inspect the
coolant level in the radiator.
NOTE
If overheating is evident, allow system to cool
completely and check coolant level in the radiator and
inspect for signs of trapped air in system.
WARNING
Never remove the pressure cap when the engine is
warm or hot. Escaping steam can cause severe burns.
The engine must be cool before removing the pressure
• A 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and distilled water will cap.
provide the optimum cooling, corrosion protection, and
antifreeze protection. 5. Remove the pressure cap. Using a funnel, add
• Do not use tap water, straight antifreeze or straight coolant to the top of the filler neck.
water in the system. Tap water contains minerals and
6. Reinstall the pressure cap.
impurities which build up in the system.
• Straight water or antifreeze may cause the system to NOTE
freeze, corrode, or overheat.
Use of a non-standard pressure cap will not allow the
Recommended Coolant: recovery system to function properly.
Polaris 50/50 Extended Life Anti-freeze
2880514 (quart) 7. Remove recovery bottle cap and add coolant using a
2880513 (gallon) funnel.
8. Fill recovery bottle to MAX level with recommended COOLING SYSTEM HOSES
coolant or 50/50 or 60/40 mixture of antifreeze and 1. Inspect all vehicle hoses for cracks, deterioration,
distilled water as required for freeze protection in abrasion or leaks. Replace if necessary.
your area.
Recommended Coolant:
Polaris 50/50 Extended Life Anti-freeze
2880514 (quart)
2
2880513 (gallon)
WARNING
Never remove pressure cap when engine is warm or
hot. The cooling system is under pressure and serious
burns may result. Allow the engine to cool before
servicing.
2. Inspect all engine hoses for cracks, deterioration, RADIATOR INSPECTION / CLEANING
abrasion or leaks. Replace if necessary. 1. Check radiator air passages for restrictions or
damage.
u Bypass Hose
i Water Pump Outlet Hose q Radiator
o Oil Cooler Inlet Hose w Shroud
a Oil Cooler Outlet Hose e Fan
3. Check tightness and condition of all hose spring 2. Carefully straighten any bent radiator fins.
clamps. Replace if necessary. 3. Remove any obstructions with low pressure
compressed air or low pressure water.
CAUTION
Washing the vehicle with a high-pressure washer could
damage the radiator fins and impair the radiators
effectiveness. Use of a high-pressure washer is not
recommended.
WARNING
Never drain the coolant when the engine and radiator
are warm or hot. Hot coolant can cause severe burns.
Allow engine and radiator to cool. 2
2. Slowly remove the pressure cap to relieve any
cooling system pressure.
3. Place a suitable drain pan underneath the radiator
fitting on the front right side of the vehicle.
4. Drain the coolant from the radiator by removing the
lower coolant hose from the radiator as shown q.
FUEL LINES
1. Check the quick-connect fuel line q at the fuel tank
for signs of wear, deterioration, damage or leakage.
Replace line(s) if necessary.
NOTE
Neither filter is serviceable individually. Must replace
the fuel pump as an assembly.
Refer to Chapter 4 for fuel pump replacement and all
other information related to the EFI System.
3. Be sure fuel lines are routed and retained properly.
NOTE
Make sure lines are not kinked or pinched.
NOTE
If the filter has been soaked with fuel or oil it must be
replaced.
2
5. Inspect the air filter and replace if necessary.
NOTE
DO NOT attempt to clean the air filter.
6. Place the air filter into the air box and reinstall the air
box cover.
NOTE
Be sure the lower tabs on the air box cover are properly
engaged into the airbox.
NOTE
Do not hold the throttle pedal wide open for more than 5
3. Inspect the pre-filter. If necessary, clean with soapy seconds.
water and dry with low pressure compressed air.
6. Allow the engine RPM to return to idle, then shift the
transmission into low gear.
7. Test the PVT system for belt slippage. If the belt
slips, repeat the process or remove the outer clutch
cover to inspect the PVT system (see Chapter 4 –
PVT SYSTEM SERVICE, page for service and
removal procedures).
NOTE
If the vehicle has ingested a large amount of water into
the PVT system and has not been operated for a period
of time, be sure to check the PVT system components
for water damage.
TORQUE
Wheel Lug Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Wheel Nuts
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
(Cast Aluminum Wheels)
Hub Retaining Nuts
180 ft-lbs (244 Nm)
(Front and Rear)
Step 1: 24 in-lbs (3 Nm)
Beadlock Screws Step 2: 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
NOTE
Do not lubricate the stud or the lug nut.
MEASUREMENT
Tire Lug Service Limit:
Replace if 1/8″ (3 mm) or less.
WARNING
Operating with worn tires will increase the possibility of
the vehicle skidding easily with possible loss of control.
Worn tires can cause an accident. Always replace tires 3. Dismount the tire on the side with the beadlock holes.
when the usable tread depth has worn out. 4. Place the beadlock ring so the tire is sandwiched
between the rim and the ring making sure the valve
stem is aligned with the slot in the ring.
TIRE PRESSURE 5. Install bolts and thread them to 24 in-lbs (3 Nm).
6. Tighten in a criss-cross pattern to 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm).
Remove the valve stem cap and check tire pressure
using the tire pressure gauge included in the vehicle’s
tool kit.
CAUTION
Maintain proper tire pressure. Refer to the warning tire
pressure decal applied to the vehicle.
TORQUE
Beadlock Screws:
Step 1: 24 in-lbs (3 Nm)Step 2: 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
NOTE
Beadlock bolts should be checked and torqued every
2
300 miles (450 km).
10. Add the recommended amount of lubricant through FRONT GEARCASE LUBRICATION
the fill plug hole. Maintain the lubricant level at the
bottom of the fill plug hole when filling the NOTE
transmission. Do not overfill.
It is important to follow the front gearcase maintenance
FLUID CAPACITY intervals described in the Periodic Maintenance Chart.
Regular fluid level inspections should be performed as
Recommended Transmission Lubricant:
AGL
well. 2
Capacity: 44 oz (1300 mL) The front gearcase fluid level should be checked and
Capacity (INT’L): changed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
40.5 oz (1200 mL)
• Be sure vehicle is positioned on a level surface when
checking or changing the fluid.
11. Reinstall the fill plug and torque to specification. • Check vent hose to be sure it is routed properly and
TORQUE unobstructed.
Transmission Fill / Drain Plug Torque: Front Gearcase Fluid Level Check
14 ft-lbs (19 Nm) The fill plug is located on the bottom right side of the front
gearcase. Access the fill plug through the right front
12. Check for leaks. Dispose of used lubricant properly. wheel well. Maintain fluid level even with the bottom of
the fill plug hole.
1. Position vehicle on a level surface.
2. Remove the fill plug q and check the fluid level.
TORQUE
Front Gearcase Fill / Drain Plug Torque:
10 ft-lbs (14 Nm)
7. Remove the drain plug w and allow fluid to drain 2. Inspect shift cable, clevis pin, pivot bushings r, and
completely. dust boot e. Replace if worn or damaged.
8. Clean the drain plug magnetic surface. 3. If adjustment is required, loosen the lower jam nut y
and pull the cable out of the mount w to move the
9. Reinstall the drain plug and torque to specification. upper jam nut t.
10. Add the recommended amount of fluid through the fill
hole. Maintain the fluid level even with the bottom
threads of the fill plug hole.
FLUID CAPACITY
Recommended Front Gearcase Fluid:
Demand Drive Fluid 2877922 (quart)
Capacity: approx. 8.5 oz (250 mL)
TORQUE
Front Gearcase Fill / Drain Plug Torque:
10 ft-lbs (14 Nm)
4. Adjust the shift cable so there is the same amount of
12. Check for leaks. Dispose of used fluid properly. cable travel when shifting slightly past HIGH gear
and PARK.
SHIFT CABLE INSPECTION / ADJUSTMENT 5. Thread the upper or lower jam nut as required to
Shift cable adjustment may be necessary if symptoms obtain proper cable adjustment.
include:
NOTE
• No gear position or AWD display on instrument cluster
• Ratcheting noise on deceleration This procedure may require a few attempts to obtain
• Inability to engage into a gear the proper adjustment.
• Excessive gear lash (noise)
• Gear selector moving out of desired range 6. Once the proper adjustment is obtained, place the
1. Locate the shift cable q attached to the transmission shift cable and upper jam nut into the mount. Tighten
case in the right rear wheel well area. the lower jam nut against the mount.
7. Start engine and shift through all gears to ensure the
shift cable is properly adjusted. If transmission still
ratchets after cable adjustment, the transmission will
require service.
The line runs parallel with the fuel supply line and is
retained by a zip tie e attached to the cargo box front
bracket. The line terminates to open air (does not
terminate to a fitting or hole in the frame).
STEERING
STEERING INSPECTION STEERING WHEEL FREE-PLAY
The steering components should be checked periodically Check steering wheel for specified free-play and
for loose fasteners, worn tie rod ends, ball joints and operation.
damage. Also check to make sure all cotter pins are in
1. Position the vehicle on level ground.
place. If cotter pins are removed, they must be replaced.
Replace any worn or damaged steering components. 2. Lightly turn the steering wheel left and right.
Steering should move freely through the entire range of 3. There should be about 0.8-1.0″ (20-25 mm) of free-
travel without binding. Check routing of all cables, hoses, play.
and wiring to be sure the steering mechanism is not
restricted or limited. 4. If there is excessive free-play or the steering feels
rough, inspect the following components.
NOTE • Tie Rod Ends q
Check front end alignment whenever steering • Steering Shaft U-Joints w
components are replaced. • Steering Gearbox e
WARNING
Due to the critical nature of the procedures outlined in
this chapter, Polaris recommends steering component
repair and adjustment be performed by an authorized
Polaris MSD certified technician.
TIE ROD END / WHEEL HUB INSPECTION WHEEL TOE ALIGNMENT INSPECTION
• To check for play in the tie rod end, grasp the steering 1. Place machine on a smooth level surface and set
tie rod, pull in all directions feeling for movement. steering wheel in a straight ahead position. Secure
the steering wheel in this position.
2. Place a chalk mark on the center line of the front tires
approximately 10″ (25.4 cm) from the floor or as
close to the hub/axle center line as possible q.
2
NOTE
Be sure steering wheel is straight ahead before
determining which tie rod needs adjustment.
CAUTION
During tie rod adjustment, it is very important that the
following precautions be taken when tightening tie rod
end jam nuts.
If the rod end is positioned incorrectly it will not pivot,
and may break.
MEASUREMENT
Wheel Toe-Out:
1/8" to 3/16″ (3.2 to 4.8 mm)
TORQUE
Tie Rod Jam Nut:
14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
CAUTION
When tightening the tie rod end jam nuts, the rod ends
must be held parallel to prevent rod end damage and
premature wear. Damage may not be immediately
apparent if done incorrectly.
SUSPENSION
SPRING ADJUSTMENT (WALKER EVANS) Shock Spanner / Clutch Spreader Tool:
The front and rear shocks have a ride height adjustment. 2878925
Suspension springs may be adjusted to suit different
riding conditions or vehicle payloads.
NOTE
2
WARNING Polaris does not recommend increasing the spring
adjustment by more than one inch (25.4 mm) over the
Uneven adjustment may cause poor handling of the factory setting r as it may negatively impact vehicle
vehicle, which could result in serious injury or death. stability. Always return the spring preload to the factory
Always adjust both the left and right spring equally. setting after the load is removed from the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE HOSE AND FITTING INSPECTION BRAKE PAD / DISC INSPECTION
Check brake system hoses and fittings for cracks, 1. Check the brake pads for wear, damage, or
deterioration, abrasion, and leaks. Tighten any loose looseness.
fittings and replace any worn or damaged parts.
2. Inspect the brake pad surface for excessive wear.
2
BRAKE FLUID INSPECTION 3. Pads should be changed when the friction material
Always check the brake pedal travel and inspect the
q is worn below the service limit.
brake fluid reservoir level before each operation. If the
fluid level is low, add DOT 4 brake fluid only.
Brake fluid should be changed every two years. The fluid
should also be changed anytime the fluid becomes
contaminated, the fluid level is below the minimum level,
or if the type and brand of the fluid in the reservoir is
unknown.
The brake fluid master cylinder reservoir can be
accessed through the left front wheel well.
1. Position the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Place the transmission in PARK.
3. View the brake fluid level in the reservoir q. The
level should be between the MAX and MIN level
lines.
MEASUREMENT
Brake Pad / Backing Plate Thickness
Service Limit: .180″ (4.6 mm)
4. If the fluid level is lower than the MIN level line, add
brake fluid until it reaches the MAX level line.
5. Install the reservoir cap and apply the brake pedal
forcefully for a few seconds and check for fluid
leakage around the master cylinder fittings and the
brake caliper fittings.
MEASUREMENT
Brake Disc Thickness
Service Limit: .170″ (4.32 mm)
WARNING
Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric
acid. Serious burns can result from contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Antidote:
• External: Flush with water.
2. Disconnect the black (negative) battery cable(s).
• Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk.
Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or 3. Disconnect the red (positive) battery cable(s).
vegetable oil. Call physician immediately.
• Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get CAUTION
prompt medical attention. To reduce the chance of sparks: Whenever removing
Batteries produce explosive gases. the battery, disconnect the black (negative) cable first.
Keep sparks, flame, cigarettes, etc. away. Ventilate When reinstalling the battery, install the black (negative)
when charging or using in an enclosed space. Always cable last.
shield eyes when working near batteries.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. 4. Remove the battery hold-down bracket w.
NOTE
Batteries must be fully charged before use or battery
life will be reduced by 10-30% of full potential. Charge
battery according to “Charging Procedure”, page 11.48.
Do not use the vehicle’s stator/alternator to charge a
new battery.
TORQUE
Battery Terminal Fasteners:
60 in-lbs (7 Nm)
SPARK PLUG SERVICE 6. Inspect electrodes for wear and carbon buildup. Look
Inspect and replace the spark plugs at the intervals for a sharp outer edge with no rounding or erosion of
outlined in the Period Maintenance Chart. the electrodes.
CAUTION
Severe engine damage may occur if the incorrect spark
plug is used.
TORQUE
Spark Plug Torque:
7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
CHAPTER 3
ENGINE / COOLING SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
ENGINE LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 3
OIL PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
ENGINE OIL FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (1000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
AIR BOX / AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
EXHAUST SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE CAP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
RADIATOR REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
THERMOSTAT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
COOLING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14
COOLING SYSTEM BLEEDING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.15
WATER PUMP REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.16
WATER PUMP INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.16
WATER PUMP SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.18
ENGINE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.21
ACCESSIBLE ENGINE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.21
TOP-END SERVICE (ENGINE IN CHASSIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.21
CRANKSHAFT PTO SEAL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.22
ENGINE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24
ENGINE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.27
ENGINE MOUNTING AND TORQUE VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.30
ENGINE BREAK-IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.30
ENGINE LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.31
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION - TOP END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.32
VALVE COVER REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.32
CAMSHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.32
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.34
CAMSHAFT / CAMSHAFT BORE INSPECTION (1000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.35
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.36
CYLINDER HEAD WARP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.37
CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.37
VALVE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.38
COMBUSTION CHAMBER CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.39
VALVE SEALING TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.40
VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING (1000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.40
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS ENGINE LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS
TOOL DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER FLUID CAPACITY
Bench Mount Engine Stand Oil Capacity *
Adapter PW-47053 2.5 qt (2.4 L)
TORQUE
Crankcase Oil Gallery Plug (M20):
22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)
Cam Lobe Height - Exhaust 1.5142 - 1.5181" (38.46 - 38.56 mm) 1.5122" (38.41 mm)
Camshaft Journal O.D. - All .9036 - .9055" (22.954 - 22.999 mm) .9033" (22.944 mm)
Camshaft
Camshaft Carrier Bore I.D. - All .9055 - .9063" (23.000 - 23.021 mm) .9072" (23.044 mm)
Camshaft Oil Clearance .0000 - .0026" (0.001 - 0.067 mm) .0039" (0.1 mm)
Camshaft End Play .0040 - .0100" (0.101 - 0.254 mm) .0157" (0.4 mm)
Valve Stem Oil Clearance - Exhaust .0011 - .0023" (0.030 - 0.060 mm) -
Valve Seat - Contacting Width - Exhaust .0590 ± .0039" (1.5 ± 0.10 mm) .0748" (1.9 mm)
Valve Seat
30.0° ± 1.5°
Valve Seat Angles 45.0° ± 0.5° -
60.0° ± 1.5°
Piston Pin O.D. .7873 - .7875" (20.000 - 20.005 mm) .7866" (19.98 mm)
Top Ring .010 - .014" (0.25 - 0.35 mm) .0196" (0.5 mm)
Installed
Gap
Second Ring .015 - .025" (0.37 - 0.63 mm) .028" (0.70 mm) 3
Piston Ring Oil Control Rails .008 - .028" (0.20 - 0.70 mm) .0354" (0.9 mm)
Connecting Rod Small End I.D. .7879 - .7885" (20.015 - 20.030 mm) .7897" (20.06 mm)
1 - Marking Conn. Rod Big End Bore I.D. 1.7318 - 1.7321" (43.989 - 43.996 mm) -
Connecting
Rod 2 - Marking Conn. Rod Big End Bore I.D. 1.7321 - 1.7323" (43.996 - 44.003 mm) -
3 - Marking Conn. Rod Big End Bore I.D. 1.7323 - 1.7326" (44.003 - 44.010 mm) -
B - Marking Main Journal O.D. 1.6140 - 1.6143" (40.996 - 41.004 mm) 1.6129" (40.970 mm)
G-
Main Journal O.D. 1.6137 - 1.6140" (40.988 - 40.995 mm) 1.6129" (40.970 mm)
Marking
Y - Marking Main Journal O.D. 1.6134 - 1.6137" (40.980 - 40.987 mm) 1.6129" (40.970 mm)
B - Marking Rod Journal O.D. 1.6118 - 1.6122" (40.942 - 40.950 mm) 1.6104" (40.906 mm)
Crankshaft
G-
Rod Journal O.D. 1.6115 - 1.6118" (40.934 - 40.941 mm) 1.6104" (40.906 mm)
Marking
Y - Marking Rod Journal O.D. 1.6112 - 1.6115" (40.926 - 40.933 mm) 1.6104" (40.906 mm)
Balance Bearing Journal O.D. (Standard) 1.4939 - 1.4946" (37.946 - 37.962 mm) 1.4921" (37.900 mm)
Shaft
Fan Off 192° F (89° C) 2. Remove pressure cap and pressure test the cooling
system using a commercially available pressure
Fan On 198° F (92° C) tester.
Thermostat Full Open 203° F (95° C)
Engine Temperature 233° F (112° C)
Overheat Indicator
Engine Protection
236° F (113° C)
Ignition Misfire
Engine Protection 257° F (125° C)
Shutdown
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Cooling System Capacity 5.36 qt (5.0 L)
Pressure Cap Relief 13 PSI
3. The system must maintain 10 psi for five minutes or
Polaris 50/50 Extended Life Anti-freeze longer. If pressure loss is evident within five minutes,
2880514 (quart) check the filler neck, radiator, hoses, clamps and
2880513 (gallon) water pump weep hole for leakage.
Recommended Coolant
Use only high quality antifreeze/coolant mixed with
distilled water in a 50/50 or 60/40 ratio, depending on
freeze protection required in your area.
CAUTION
Using tap water in the cooling system will lead to a
buildup of deposits which may restrict coolant flow and
reduce heat dissipation, resulting in possible engine
damage. Polaris Premium 60/40 Antifreeze/Coolant is
recommended for use in all cooling systems and comes
pre-mixed, ready to use.
WARNING
The cooling system is under pressure and serious
burns may result.
Allow the engine to cool before servicing.
WARNING
The cooling system is under pressure and serious
burns may result.
Allow the engine to cool before servicing.
NOTE
Image shown above is with engine removed for clarity.
TORQUE
Thermostat Cover Bolts:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
COOLING SYSTEM BLEEDING 6. Open the bleed screw e to allow any trapped air to
PROCEDURE escape. Close the bleed screw once a steady stream
of coolant begins to drain out.
WARNING
Always wear safety glasses and proper shop clothing
when performing the procedures in this manual. Failing
to do so may lead to possible injury or death.
CAUTION
Use caution when performing these procedures. 3
Coolant may be hot and may cause severe injury or
burns.
NOTE
If the coolant level is LOW in the radiator, or if there are
leaks in the system, the coolant system will not draw
coolant from the reservoir tank. 7. Tighten the bleed screw to specification, top off
coolant and properly install the pressure cap.
1. Allow engine and cooling system to cool down.
TORQUE
CAUTION Coolant Bleed Screw:
Be sure the engine has cooled and no pressure is built 89 in-lb (10 Nm)
up in the cooling system before removing the pressure
cap. The coolant may be hot and could cause severe 8. Start the engine and allow it to idle until the coolant
injury or burns. fan has cycled two times.
9. Allow engine and cooling system to completely cool
2. Remove the hood. down (see CAUTION).
3. Remove the recovery bottle cap q and fill the bottle 10. Remove the pressure cap. Add the necessary
to the MAX line. amount of Polaris Premium Antifreeze to the radiator
filler neck.
11. Open the bleed screw to allow any trapped air to
escape. Close the bleed screw once a steady stream
of coolant begins to drain out.
12. Tighten the bleed screw to specification, top off
coolant and properly install the pressure cap.
TORQUE
Coolant Bleed Screw:
89 in-lb (10 Nm)
6. Rotate water pump drive tab r so it matches the 11. Install the four coolant hoses u – a that attach to
angle of the drive slot in the engine. the water pump. Be sure orientation and routing are
correct.
CAUTION 12. Install the right rear lower shock bolt and new nut.
The water pump drive tab and slot must be aligned Torque mounting bolt to specification.
properly during installation. Severe engine or water
pump damage will occur if the tab and slot are not in TORQUE
alignment during water pump installation. Rear Shock Mounting Bolt:
70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
7. Maneuver water pump up through the access hole in
the skid plate on the RH side of the vehicle. 13. Install the right rear wheel. Torque wheel nuts to
specification.
8. Slide water pump into engine crankcase.
9. Be sure water pump is fully seated and the drive tab TORQUE
and slot are properly engaged. Wheel Nuts:
10. Install the three water pump mounting bolts t & y 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
and torque to specification.
14. Connect the (-) negative battery cable.
15. Fill and bleed cooling system as outlined in this
chapter.
16. Install the hood, engine service panel and seats.
NOTE
Install different bolt lengths as shown.
TORQUE
Water Pump Mounting Bolts:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)(Apply Loctite® 204™ to bolt threads)
14. Install a NEW mechanical seal into the water pump 20. Install the water pump cover and three retaining bolts
housing using special tool (PU-50564) u. Press the i. Torque bolts in sequence to specification.
new mechanical seal in until it is flush with the water
pump housing.
TORQUE
15. Rotate water pump shaft after seal installation to Water Pump Cover Bolts:
verify free movement. 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)(Apply Loctite® 204™ to bolt threads)
16. Place impeller onto the water pump shaft.
21. Install two new water pump (O-rings) and lubricate
17. Apply Loctite® 204™ to the threads of the impeller them with fresh engine oil.
bolt. Install washer and impeller bolt and torque to
specification.
TORQUE
Water Pump Impeller Bolt:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)(Apply Loctite® 204™ to bolt threads)
ENGINE SERVICE
ACCESSIBLE ENGINE COMPONENTS TOP-END SERVICE (ENGINE IN CHASSIS)
The following components can be serviced or removed Some top-end engine components can be serviced while
with the engine installed: the engine is mounted in the chassis.
• Camshaft(s) To service the top-end of the engine refer to Valve
• Camshaft Sprocket(s) Clearance Inspection, page 2.32, which provides
• Cylinder Head detailed steps to access the valve cover.
• Flywheel
• Oil Cooler
•
•
Starter Motor / Idler Gear Asm
Stator (Alternator)
3
• Thermostat
• Valve Cover
• Water Pump
The following components require engine removal for
service:
• Camshaft Timing Chain
• Connecting Rod(s)
• Counterbalance Shaft / Bearings
• Crankcase
• Crankshaft / Main Bearings
• Crankshaft Seal (PTO)
• Cylinder
• Oil Pump / Oil Pump Sprocket or Chain
• Piston / Rings
IMPORTANT
PU-52493 is specifically designed for 2018 engines and
IMPORTANT
does NOT work with 2017 and older models. Use care not to scratch the crankcase while removing
seal.
CRANKSHAFT PTO SEAL INSTALLATION 2. Tighten the drive bolt e until the cylinder r bottoms
out against the crankcase.
1. Install new seal w into crankcase. Thread the drive
bolt of special tool PU-52493 q into the crankshaft.
ENGINE REMOVAL 10. Remove the outer clutch cover screws w and
remove the cover from the vehicle.
NOTE
Some engine repair procedures can be performed
without removing the engine assembly from the vehicle.
Refer to Accessible Engine Components, page 3.21 for
further information.
The use of an overhead or portable engine hoist is the
only recommended method for removing and installing
the engine.
Have an assistant help guide the engine in and out of
the vehicle while using an engine hoist to prevent
personal injury or damage to vehicle components.
WARNING
Always wear safety glasses and proper shop clothing 11. Remove drive belt, drive clutch, driven clutch, inner
when performing the procedures in this Service clutch cover and clutch outlet duct (see Chapter 5 –
Manual. Failing to do so may lead to possible injury. PVT Disassembly, page 5.9).
WARNING
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip NOTE
or fall. Serious injury may occur if vehicle tips or falls.
Be sure to use the correct Drive Clutch Puller (PN
2872085) to prevent damage to crankshaft.
9. Remove lower mounting bolt q from the left rear
shock and discard the nut. Install a new nut upon
assembly.
12. Disconnect the TMAP sensor e, fuel injector 19. Remove the six fasteners that attach the exhaust
harness leads r, CPS t, ECT sensor y, and head pipe to the engine. Remove the two exhaust
ignition coil harness lead. Remove wire ties retaining springs i that attach the head pipe o to the muffler.
harness to the fuel rail and rear cross member. Remove exhaust head pipe towards the front of the
vehicle. Discard exhaust gaskets a.
NOTE
The spark plug wires are marked with MAG and PTO.
Note during installation procedure.
22. Use an overhead or portable engine hoist and 26. Remove the starter motor bolts 2) and starter motor
suitable engine straps to secure engine in its current from the engine.
position.
23. Remove the four rear mounting bolts j that attach
the rear of the engine to the transmission.
NOTE
Have an assistant help guide the engine in and out of
the vehicle while using an engine hoist to prevent
personal injury or damage to vehicle components.
ENGINE INSTALLATION 5. Align both the front and rear engine mounting
locations. Install and hand tighten the four front
1. Attach engine with suitable lifting straps to an engine mounting nuts q and bolts w.
overhead or portable engine hoist.
2. Remove the engine stand adapter plate and install
the starter motor back onto engine. Torque starter
motor bolts to specification.
3. Install transmission joint bracket onto engine and
torque fasteners to specification in sequence.
NOTE
DO NOT torque fasteners at this time.
TORQUE
Starter Motor Bolts:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
HOLE YEAR VEHICLE DESCRIPTION 11. Install the two longer bolts into left side mounting
2015-18 ACE 570 holes. Torque left side mounting bolts to specification
2015-16 RGR ETX using the numbered sequence shown.
2013–18 RZR 570
2014–18 RANGER 500/570
2015-18 RANGER 570 Full-Size
2014-18 RANGER 900/1000
2015-18 RZR 900
4
2016-18 RZR 1000
2016–18 ACE 900
5 2015-18 RANGER Diesel
TORQUE
Engine / Transmission Mounting Bolts:
Step 1-2: 64 ft-lb (87 Nm) Step 3: 5 ft-lb (7 Nm) Step
4-7: 44 ft-lb (60 Nm)
17. Install front support bracket u and rear support i 28. Properly route and connect the harness leads for the
onto the vehicle frame. Torque fasteners to stator, CPS, TMAP sensor, ECT sensor, fuel injectors
specification. and ignition coil.
29. Install the air box assembly as outlined in the EFI
Chapter (See Chapter 4 – ETC Replacement, page
4.41).
30. Install the inner clutch cover, drive clutch, driven
clutch, drive belt, outer clutch cover and clutch outlet
duct (see Chapter 6 – PVT Assembly, page 5.11).
31. Install the left rear shock lower mounting bolt and new
nut. Torque to specification.
TORQUE
3
Rear Shock Mounting Bolt:
70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
32. Install the left rear wheel and torque wheel nuts to
specification.
18. Install push rivet through heat shield o into rear TORQUE
cross member.
19. Install the exhaust heat shield and push rivets. Wheel Nuts:
20. Replace exhaust gaskets (seals). Install exhaust 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
head pipe. Install the six fasteners that attach the
exhaust head pipe to the engine and torque to 33. Install the rear bumper and cargo box as an
specification. assembly.
TORQUE NOTE
Exhaust Head Pipe Bolts: Be sure to connect the engine intake hose and clutch
18 ft-lb (24 Nm) air intake hose to the rear cargo box asm upon
installation.
21. Install the two exhaust springs that attach the head
pipe to the muffler. 34. Connect the (-) negative battery cable.
22. Install the breather hose to the crankcase. 35. Remove the pressure cap and fill the cooling system
23. Install the spark plug wires to the appropriate cylinder through the filler neck with properly mixed anti-freeze
by referencing the MAG and PTO spark plug wire / coolant.
decals. 36. Install a new oil filter. Lubricate the seal with engine
oil prior to installation (see Chapter 2 – Engine Oil
NOTE and Filter Change, page 2.30).
Ensure plug wires caps are pushed down all the way so 37. Add approximately 2.5 quarts (3.3 L) of Polaris PS-4
they engage onto the spark plugs. or PS-4 Extreme Duty Synthetic Engine Oil to the
engine. Additional oil may be required after complete
engine disassembly. Check level after filling and add
24. Install the throttle body assembly and connect fuel oil as needed.
lines. Install throttle cable retaining clip. 38. Follow the Cooling System Bleeding Procedure, page
25. Secure wire harness in the routing clip on the rear 3.15 as outlined in this chapter.
cross member. 39. Install the seats.
26. Install (+) positive cable to the starter motor. 40. Start engine and check for any oil or coolant leaks.
27. Install (-) negative cable to the starter motor mounting 41. Turn the key OFF and check the engine oil level.
bolt. 42. Refer customer to “Engine Break-In Period” upon
returning vehicle to customer.
ENGINE BREAK-IN PERIOD 6. Change oil and oil filter after 25 hour break-in period.
The break-in period consists of the first 25 hours of
operation, or the time it takes to use 15 gallons (57 liters)
of fuel. Careful treatment of a new engine and drive
components will result in more efficient performance and
longer life for these components.
CAUTION
Use only Polaris PS-4 or PS-4 Extreme Duty Synthetic
4-Cycle Engine Oil.Never substitute or mix oil brands.
Serious engine damage and voiding of warranty can
result.Do not operate at full throttle or high speeds for
extended periods during the first three hours of use.
Excessive heat can build up and cause damage to
close fitted engine parts.
Oil Type
PS-4 Full Synthetic 5W-50
2876244 (quart)
2876245 (gallon)
(-35° F to 100° F) 3
PS-4 Extreme Duty
2878920 (quart)
2878919 (gallon)
Oil Filter
PN 2540086
1. Remove the four valve cover shoulder bolts q and 1. Rotate the engine so the PTO cylinder is at Top
isolators w using a T40 driver. Dead Center (TDC) to relieve most of the valve
spring pressure. The camshaft lobes should face out
q and the slots on the end of the camshafts should
line up.
2. Remove the cam chain tensioner w from the 4. Remove the remaining two bolts that retain the front
cylinder. Replace the sealing washer or gaskete camshaft carrier t and carefully lift the carrier off the
upon reassembly. camshafts.
NOTE
The engine may have a hydraulic (first image) or
mechanical (second image) cam chain tensioner.
NOTE
The crankcase has a built-in lower guide to prevent the
chain from falling off the crankshaft.
9. Evenly loosen the four bolts retaining each rear CAMSHAFT SPROCKET INSPECTION
camshaft carrier a and carefully lift the carriers off Inspect cam sprocket teeth q for wear or damage.
the camshafts. Replace timing chain and sprockets if worn or damaged.
CAMSHAFT / CAMSHAFT BORE 4. Measure the diameter of the camshaft journals using
INSPECTION (1000) a micrometer. Compare to specification.
Inspect all main journals and cam lobes as described
below and compare to specifications. Replace camshaft
(s) or cylinder head if worn beyond service limit or if any
surface is pitted or damaged.
1. Visually inspect each cam lobe for wear or damage.
2. Measure the height of each cam lobe from the base
circle to highest point on the lobe using a
micrometer. Compare to specification. 3
NOTE
Replace camshafts if damaged or if any part is worn
past the service limit.
MEASUREMENT
Camshaft Journal O.D.:
.9036 - .9055" (22.954 - 22.999 mm)
Service Limit:
1.5370" (39.04 mm)
Exhaust:
1.5142 - 1.5181" (38.46 - 38.56 mm)
Service Limit:
1.5122" (38.41 mm)
NOTE
Replace cylinder head if camshaft journal bores are
damaged or if worn past the service limit.
MEASUREMENT
2. Loosen the six cylinder head bolts e evenly 1/8 turn
Camshaft Carrier Bore I.D.: at a time until all are loose.
.9055 - .9063" (23.000 - 23.021 mm)
3. Remove and discard the cylinder head bolts.
Service Limit: 4. Tap cylinder head lightly with a soft faced hammer
.9072" (23.044 mm) until loose.
5. Tap only in reinforced areas or on thick parts of the
7. Calculate oil clearance by subtracting camshaft cylinder head casting.
journal O. D. s from camshaft carrier bore I. D. s.
Compare to specification. 6. Remove the cylinder head and head gasket r.
MEASUREMENT NOTE
Calculated Camshaft Oil Clearance: Once the cylinder head is removed, nothing retains the
.0000 - .0026" (0.001 - 0.067 mm) cylinder to the engine. DO NOT rotate the engine
without using the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing
Service Limit: Plate (PU-50563). Refer to Cylinder / Piston Removal,
.0039" (0.1 mm) page 3.54.
MEASUREMENT
Cylinder Head Warp Limit:
.0039″ (0.1 mm)
MEASUREMENT
Valve Stem Diameter:
Intake:
.2155 - .2161" (5.475 - 5.490 mm)
NOTE
Exhaust: Carbon Clean Fuel Treatment (2871326) can be used
.2147 - .2153" (5.455 - 5.470 mm) to help remove carbon deposits.
Do not use a metal scraper, a coarse wire brush or
6. Measure valve guide inside diameter at the top, abrasive cleaners to clean the cylinder head. Damage
middle and end of the guide using a small hole may result.
gauge and a micrometer. Measure in two directions.
2. Visually inspect cylinder head gasket surface and
combustion chamber for cracks or damage. Pay
close attention to areas around spark plug and valve
seats.
MEASUREMENT
Valve Guide I.D.:
.2165 - .2171" (5.500 - 5.515 mm)
NOTE
The valve guides cannot be replaced.
WARNING
Wear eye protection or a face shield during cylinder
head disassembly and reassembly.
4. Inspect the cut area of the seat: 7. Remove valve and check where the Prussian Blue™
* If the contact area is less than 75% of the indicates seat contact on the valve face. The valve
circumference of the seat, rotate the pilot 180° and seat should contact the middle of the valve face or
make another light cut. slightly above, and must be the proper width.
* If the indicated seat contact is at the top edge of the
* If the cutter now contacts the uncut portion of the
valve face and contacts the margin area w it is too
seat, check the pilot. Look for burrs, nicks, or runout.
high on the valve face. Use the 30° cutter to lower
If the pilot is bent it must be replaced.
the valve seat.
* If the contact area of the cutter is in the same place,
* If too low, use the 60° cutter to raise the seat. When
the valve guide is distorted from improper
contact area is centered on the valve face, measure
installation.
* If the contact area of the initial cut is greater than
seat width. 3
* If the seat is too wide or uneven, use both top and
75%, continue to cut the seat until all pits are
removed and a new seat surface is evident. bottom cutters to narrow the seat.
* If the seat is too narrow, widen using the 45° cutter
NOTE and re-check contact point on the valve face and
Remove only the amount of material necessary to seat width after each cut.
repair the seat surface.
NOTE
5. To check contact area of the seat on the valve face, When using an interference angle, the seat contact
apply a thin coating of Prussian Blue™ paste to the point on the valve will be very narrow, and is a normal
valve seat. If using an interference angle (46°) apply condition. Look for an even and continuous contact
black permanent marker to the entire valve face q. point all the way around the valve face e.
6. Insert valve into guide and tap valve lightly into place
a few times.
Service Limit:
.0551" (1.4 mm)
Exhaust:
.0590 ± .0039" (1.5 ± 0.10 mm)
Service Limit:
.0748" (1.9 mm)
8. Clean all filings from the area with hot soapy water.
Rinse and dry with compressed air.
9. Lubricate valve guides with clean engine oil and
apply oil or water based lapping compound to the
face of the valve.
NOTE
Exhaust Seat Cutter Diameter: 1.364″ (34.65 mm)
Lapping is not required if an interference angle
reconditioning method is used.
10. Insert the valve into its respective guide and lap
using a lapping tool or a section of fuel line
connected to the valve stem.
11. Rotate the valve rapidly back and forth until the cut
sounds smooth. Lift the valve slightly off of the seat,
rotate 1/4 turn, and repeat the lapping process. Do
this four to five times until the valve is fully seated,
and repeat process for the other valve(s).
12. Thoroughly clean cylinder head and valves.
CAUTION
The flywheel contains powerful magnets. Use caution
when removing and installing the stator cover. DO NOT
place fingers between cover and crankcase at any time
during the removal / installation process or injury could
result.
5. If bearing replacement is required, remove the 3. Remove the water pump assembly from the engine
retaining ring and heat the stator cover around the by using a twisting motion as you pull out on the
bearing evenly with a heat gun. Tap cover on a soft housing.
work surface to remove the bearing from the
housing. A blind bearing puller can also be used.
Replace bearing if removed.
FLYWHEEL REMOVAL 6. Hold puller body and tighten the center bolt to
remove the flywheel.
NOTE
The flywheel can be serviced with the engine installed
in the chassis.
NOTE
The starter one-way clutch can be serviced with the
engine installed in the chassis.
STARTER ONE-WAY CLUTCH 4. Inspect drive surface of starter gear e and bushing
DISASSEMBLY r for wear, damage or uneven surface. If any starter
1. Lift up to remove starter one-way gear. one-way clutch component is worn or damaged,
replace the clutch and starter gear as an assembly.
10. Use one of the oil pump retaining bolts or a pen 12. Visually inspect the oil pump and drive sprocket d
magnet to extract the dowel pins s from the oil for wear or damage. Replace oil pump drive chain
pump. Doing so allows for oil pump removal without and sprocket if worn or damaged. If any part of the oil
having to remove the pump drive sprocket. pump is damaged, the entire assembly must be
replaced. Replace the oil pump seal f during
crankcase assembly.
NOTE
If unable to extract the dowel pins from the oil pump,
the oil pump sprocket must be removed. Access the NOTE
sprocket bolt by removing the case plug. Oil pump assembly is non-serviceable
11. Lift the oil pump drive chain and remove the oil 13. Rotate the engine so the cylinder is facing up.
pump.
14. Remove the eleven M6 g and two M8 h upper
crankcase bolts.
16. Remove the eight M10 k, two M8 l and one M6 j BALANCE SHAFT REMOVAL / INSPECTION
lower crankcase bolts. Discard the eight M10 bolts. 1. Perform Crankcase Disassembly / Inspection, page
3.47 procedure.
2. Note timing marks on balance shaft and crankshaft
drive gears. Shafts must be properly timed upon
assembly.
MEASUREMENT
Balance Shaft Diameter (MAG & PTO):
1.4939 - 1.4946" (37.946 - 37.962 mm)
Service Limit:
1.4921" (37.900 mm)
5. Carefully lift the crankshaft w out of the crankcase.
7. Inspect the crankshaft gear u and auxiliary sprocket 11. Measure each main journal and connecting rod
y for broken or worn teeth. journal in two locations, 90 degrees apart. Replace
crankshaft if any journal is worn below the service
limit specification.
12. Refer to the six letters stamped onto the PTO end of
the crankshaft.
MEASUREMENT
Crankshaft Maximum Runout:
Less than .001″ (0.025 mm)
NOTE
Always replace plain bearings when the crankcase or
connecting rods have been disassembled. Refer to
Bearing Selection Identification Letters and Numbers,
page 3.59.
CYLINDER INSPECTION
1. Lay a straight edge q across the top surface of the
cylinder at several different points and measure warp
by inserting a feeler gauge between the straight
edge and the cylinder surface. If warp exceeds the
service limit, replace the cylinder.
MEASUREMENT
Cylinder Taper:
.001″ (0.025 mm)
MEASUREMENT
Standard Bore Size:
3.6614 ± .0003" (93 mm ± 0.008 mm)
MEASUREMENT
Cylinder Warp Limit:
.002″ (0.05 mm)
NOTE
DO NOT hone the cylinders or attempt to repair a
damaged cylinder by honing.
CYLINDER / PISTON REMOVAL 5. Remove the piston / connecting rod assemblies from
the cylinder.
CAUTION
Pistons must be removed from the cylinders with the
connecting rods attached.
DO NOT attempt to service the cylinder or pistons
without disassembling the crankcase. Although you can
remove the cylinder and pistons without disassembly,
you will not be able to reassemble the engine because
of the unique cylinder skirt and crankcase design.
PISTON DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION 3. Measure piston pin bore I. D. in two directions (90°
(1000) apart). Replace piston and piston pin if out of
specification.
NOTE
New pistons are directional (intake vs. exhaust), but
can be placed in either cylinder.
MEASUREMENT
Piston Pin Bore I.D.:
.7877 - .7881" (20.009 - 20.018 mm)
Service Limit:
.7893" (20.05 mm)
2. Remove piston circlip and push piston pin out of
piston. If necessary, heat the crown of the piston 4. Measure piston pin O.D. in two directions (90° apart)
slightly with a heat gun if pin cannot be removed by at three locations on the length. Replace piston and
hand. Discard circlips. piston pin if out of specification.
CAUTION
DO NOT apply heat to piston rings or a loss of radial MEASUREMENT
tension could result. Piston Pin O.D.:
.7873 - .7875" (20.000 - 20.005 mm)
Service Limit:
.7866" (19.98 mm)
MEASUREMENT
Piston Ring to Groove Clearance:
Top / Second Ring:
.0007 - .0023" (0.020 - 0.060 mm)
Service Limit:
.0047" (0.12 mm)
MEASUREMENT
Piston O.D. (Standard):
3.6597 ± .0003" (92.959 ± 0.008 mm)
MEASUREMENT
Piston Ring Installed Gap: CONNECTING ROD INSPECTION
Top Ring: .010 - .014" (0.25 - 0.35 mm) 1. The 3 digit numbers stamped onto the intake side of
Service Limit: 1.6118 - 1.6122" (40.942 - 40.950 mm) the connecting rod are serial numbers used to match
the rod cap w with the rod stem e.
Second Ring: 1.6118 - 1.6122" (40.942 - 40.950 mm)
Service Limit: .028" (0.70 mm)
NOTE
Always check piston ring installed gap when installing
new rings and/or a new cylinder.
2. The number r and letter t stamped onto the 7. Using a dial bore gauge, measure big end I.D. in two
exhaust side of the connecting rod represent the directions shown. Record measurements and
bore diameter and weight grading of the connecting compare to specifications.
rod.
MEASUREMENT
Connecting Rod Small End I.D.:
.7879 - .7885" (20.015 - 20.030 mm)
Service Limit:
.7897" (20.06 mm)
In this example, you would use the number 2 as the In this example, you would use the number 2 as the
connecting rod code. You would use letters G and G as crankcase codes (case journals 1, 2, 3, 4). You would
the crankshaft codes (crank journals 2 and 4). Based off use letters G, Y, G, Y as the crankshaft codes (crank
the bearing selection chart, you would use a Green journals 1, 3, 5 and 6). Based off the bearing selection
bearing for each connecting rod chart, you would use:
Green bearing for Main #1
Bearing Selection Chart — Rod
Yellow bearing for Main #2
Crankshaft Green bearing for Main #3
Code B G Y Yellow bearing for Main #4
1 Blue Blue Green
Rod Bearing Selection Chart — Main Bearings
2 Blue Green Yellow
Crankshaft
3 Green Yellow Yellow
Code B G Y
1 Blue Blue Green
Case
2 Blue Green Yellow
3 Green Yellow Yellow
NOTE
Ends must butt squarely together and must not overlap.
3. Install upper rail with end gap positioned on the 5. Install top ring with mark facing top of piston. Rotate
exhaust side of piston. ring to position the end gap toward exhaust side of
piston as shown below.
PISTON / CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY 3. Place piston q on connecting rod w. Push piston pin
1. Lubricate connecting rod small end, piston pin bore e through rod and piston until it seats against the
and piston pin with engine oil. installed circlip.
CAUTION
Do not re-use circlips. Circlips become deformed during
the removal process.
Do not compress the new clip more than necessary to
prevent loss of radial tension. Severe engine damage
may result if circlips are re-used or deformed during
installation. 3
2. Install a new circlip on one side of piston with gap at
the top (12:00 position) or bottom (6:00 position).
NOTE
Do not tap on pin or cause any sideways force to
connecting rod. Warm piston crown with a heat gun if
pin cannot be installed by hand, or use a piston pin
installation tool.
CAUTION
DO NOT apply heat to piston rings or a loss of radial
tension could result.
CYLINDER / PISTON INSTALLATION 4. Carefully compress the piston rings with your fingers
and install the piston assemblies into the cylinder
CAUTION from the bottom side. Use piston ring compressor
Pistons must be installed into the cylinders with the pliers (PV-43570-1) to aid in assembly, if necessary.
connecting rods attached.DO NOT attempt to service
the cylinder or pistons without disassembling the
crankcase. Although you can remove the cylinder and
pistons without disassembly, you will not be able to
reassemble the engine because of the unique cylinder
skirt and crankcase design.
NOTE
If the pistons are being reused, reassemble in the same
cylinder bore and direction from which they were
removed (MAG / PTO).
New pistons are directional (intake vs. exhaust), but
can be placed in either cylinder.
NOTE
Base gasket and surfaces must be DRY and oil free.
Use care upon assembly to keep oil away.
NOTE
Orientation arrow is also located on the bottom side of
piston as an additional reference.
10. Carefully place the cylinder and pistons into the CRANKSHAFT INSTALLATION
upper crankcase.
NOTE
Whether installing a new crankshaft or re-installing the
original, refer to the bearing selection charts (see
Chapter 3 – Crankshaft Main Bearing Selection, page
3.60 and Connecting Rod Bearing Selection, page 3.60
).
6. Apply Polaris PS-4 engine oil to each rod bearing 11. Clean bolt hole threads in connecting rod to remove
journal r and main bearing journal t of crankshaft. all oil.
12. Install matching rod cap on connecting rod with 3
digit serial number stampings aligned w & e.
NOTE
Install new M10 lower crankcase bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT block oil passages r with crankcase sealant.
10. Torque lower crankcase bolts in sequence to 13. Torque the upper crankcase bolts in sequence to
specification. Repeat sequence to verify final torque. specification (start with #12). Repeat the sequence
to verify final torque.
TORQUE
Lower Crankcase Bolts:
TORQUE
M10 Bolts: Upper Crankcase Bolts:
Step 1: 9 ft-lb (12 Nm) M8 Bolts: 26 ft-lb (35 Nm)
Step 2: 21 ft-lb (28 Nm)
M6 Bolts: 9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
Step 3: Tighten add’n 90°
14. Rotate the engine so the cylinder is facing down.
M8 Bolts:
15. Install a new seal on the oil pump.
26 ft-lb (35 Nm)
16. Lift the oil pump drive chain and install the oil pump.
M6 Bolts:
9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
17. Install dowel pins a into oil pump mounting holes. 21. Apply a thin, continuous film of Crankcase Sealant
(PN 2871557) to sump cover mating surface g as
shown. Do not allow sealant to dry before assembly.
18. Install the three bolts f that retain oil pump d to the
crankcase. Torque mounting bolts to specification.
22. Install the oil sump cover h onto the crankcase.
NOTE
Gasket surfaces must be DRY and oil free. Use care
upon assembly to keep oil away.
TORQUE
Oil Sump Cover Bolts:
M8 Bolts: 26 ft-lb (35 Nm)
TORQUE
Crankcase Drain Plug:
12 ft-lbs (16 Nm)
TORQUE
Oil Cooler bolts:
7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
NOTE
If the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing Plate (PU-
50563) is installed, remove it before tightening the
flywheel.
CAUTION
The flywheel contains powerful magnets. Use caution
when removing and installing the stator cover. DO NOT
place fingers between cover and crankcase at any time
during the removal / installation process or injury could
result.
TORQUE
Stator Cover Screws:
9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
WARNING
Wear eye protection during cylinder head disassembly
and reassembly or when working with the valve springs.
NOTE
Valve springs to be installed with paint mark facing up
i.
7. Place the valve retainer on the spring.
8. Compress the valve spring by hand using valve
spring compressor adapter (PV-43513-A). Compress
spring only enough to allow split keeper installation.
Valve spring compressor (PV-1253 or PV-4019
(Quick Release)) can be used if desired to aid in
installation.
NOTE
Valve seals should be installed AFTER the valves are in
the head to avoid valve seal damage.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the valve seals, do not compress
the valve spring more than necessary to install the
keepers.
11. Install the valve adjustment tappet i for each valve CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION
in the order they were removed. 1. Rotate the engine so the cylinder is facing up.
2. Remove the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing
Plate (PU-50563) q from the cylinder.
NOTE
Refer to Valve Clearance Adjustment, page 3.81
procedure for proper tappet selection.
NOTE
Once the cylinder head is removed, nothing retains the
NOTE cylinder to the engine. DO NOT rotate the engine
If any valve train components were replaced, refer to without using the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing
“Valve Clearance Adjustment”, page 3.81 procedure Plate (PU-50563).
prior to Camshaft Installation / Timing, page 3.76
procedure. 3. Prepare cylinder head gasket sealing surfaces by
cleaning thoroughly to remove all residue. The head
gasket must be installed clean and dry, free from oil
or grease.
NOTE
Do not touch sealing surfaces of gasket.
7. Install and finger tighten the two outer M6 bolts y CAMSHAFT INSTALLATION / TIMING
evenly.
NOTE
NOTE
If any valve train components were replaced, refer to
Install new cylinder head bolts. Valve Clearance Adjustment, page 3.81 procedure.
8. Torque cylinder head bolts in sequence to 1. Rotate the engine until the flywheel Top Dead Center
specification. (TDC) mark q is aligned or centered in the
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS) mounting hole w.
This places the PTO cylinder at TDC for camshaft
installation.
TORQUE
Cylinder Head Torque Procedure:
Torque in sequenceStep 1: 13 ft-lbs (18 Nm)Step 2: NOTE
26 ft-lb (35 Nm)Step 3: Additional 180°Step 4: M6 DO NOT use the “V” mark located on the flywheel
bolts: 7 ft-lb (10 Nm) opposite of the “I” mark. Only the “I” mark should be
used as a TDC reference.
5. Carefully install the rear camshaft carriers onto the 12. Use new camshaft sprocket retaining bolts upon
camshafts. Carrier openings should face each other assembly. Install the top bolt i in each camshaft
when installed properly. sprocket u. Do not torque the bolts at this time.
6. Install the four bolts that retain each rear camshaft
carrier y and tighten the bolts evenly until snug.
NOTE
Use new sprocket retaining bolts upon assembly.
7. Install the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing Plate
(PU-50563) into the end of camshafts as shown. Use
a 13/16” open-end wrench to rotate camshafts
slightly if needed.
NOTE
Intake cam sprocket should have “I” marks aligned with
gasket surface and the exhaust cam sprocket should
have “E” marks aligned with gasket surface.
Install the exhaust cam sprocket first (opposite the cam
chain tensioner) to ensure proper cam timing.
13. Verify cam timing is correct. Flywheel TDC mark 14. If timing marks are not aligned, remove sprockets
should still be aligned (see Step 1) and cam sprocket and correct alignment.
markings should line up as shown.
15. Remove the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing
Plate (PU-50563) from the end of the camshafts.
16. Rotate the engine using the flywheel and install the
remaining bolt in each camshaft sprocket. Torque the
sprocket bolts to specification.
TORQUE
Camshaft Sprocket Bolts:
14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
17. Rotate the engine using the flywheel and torque the
remaining sprocket bolts to specification.
18. Install the front camshaft carrier o and two outer
retaining bolts.
19. Install the fixed cam chain guide a and two retaining
bolts.
20. Torque the camshaft carriers bolts in sequence to 23. MECHANICAL TENSIONER ONLY:
specification. • Retract the plunger all the way in and install into the
cylinder.
TORQUE
Camshaft Carrier Bolts: • Install the two mounting bolts. Torque fasteners to
7 ft-lb (10 Nm) specification.
TORQUE
21. Apply Polaris PS-4 engine oil to the cam chain
tensioner bore prior to assembly. Use a new Tensioner Mounting Bolts:
tensioner sealing washer d. 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
22. HYDRAULIC TENSIONER ONLY: Install the cam
chain tensioner s into the cylinder and torque to • Install the plunger bolt. Torque fastener to
specification. specification.
TORQUE
Plunger Bolt:
15 ft-lb (20 Nm)
TORQUE
Hydraulic Cam Chain Tensioner:
29 ft-lb (40 Nm)
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use the “V” mark located on the flywheel opposite of the “I” mark. Only the “I” mark should be used as a TDC
reference
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT 6. Rotate the camshaft until the cam lobes above the
valves you are inspecting are facing up y.
NOTE
Always inspect valve clearance prior to camshaft
installation or final engine assembly.
MEASUREMENT
Intake Valve Clearance (cold):
.006 ± .002" (0.15 ± 0.05 mm)
TORQUE
Camshaft Carrier Bolts:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
10. Remove the valve tappet from a valve that was out of 16. Reinstall the camshafts and camshaft carriers and
specification. tighten the bolts evenly to specification.
TORQUE
Camshaft Carrier Bolts:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
NOTE
Keep mated parts together and in order with respect to
their location in the cylinder head for assembly
purposes. Mark each component or place them in an
organized rack as you remove them.
The proper valve tappet may also be obtained by completing these steps:
IMPORTANT
The Valve Lash Specification and Measured Valve lash must be calculated in millimeters (mm) 3
1. Subtract the actual valve lash on the engine from the valve lash specification (i.e. 0.29 mm – 0.20 mm) = 0.09 mm.
2. Divide the 3 digit tappet number by 100 (i.e. 450 / 100) = 4.5 mm.
3. Add the results of step 1 and step 2 (i.e. 0.09 mm + 4.5 mm) = 4.59 mm.
4. Multiply that answer by 100 to obtain the correct new tappet (i.e. 4.59 mm x 100 = 459).
5. Refer to the table below to find the closest available tappet size to the result from step 4 (i. e. 459 should be
rounded to 460 since there is a 460 tappet).
Available Tappets
440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540
442 452 462 472 482 492 502 512 522 532 542
445 455 465 475 485 495 505 515 525 535 545
448 458 468 478 488 498 508 518 528 538
TORQUE
Spark Plugs:
7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE • Lack of lubrication
Spark Plug Fouling • Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or ducts
• Engine oil dirty or contaminated
• Spark plug cap loose or faulty
• Incorrect spark plug heat range or gap Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup
• PVT system calibrated incorrectly/ components worn • Excessive piston-to-cylinder clearance
or mis-adjusted • Wet sumping
• Fuel quality poor (old) or octane too high • Worn rings, piston, or cylinder
• Low compression • Worn valve guides or seals
• Restricted exhaust
• Weak ignition (loose coil ground, faulty coil, or stator)
• Restricted breather 3
• Air filter dirty or contaminated
• Restricted air filter (main or pre-cleaner) or breather
system Piston Failure - Scoring
• Improperly assembled air intake system
• Restricted engine breather system • Lack of lubrication
• Oil contaminated with fuel • Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or ducts
• Engine oil dirty or contaminated
Engine Turns Over But Fails To Start
Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup
• No fuel
• Dirt in fuel line or filter • Excessive piston-to-cylinder clearance
• Fuel will not pass through fuel valve • Wet sumping due to over-full crankcase
• Fuel pump inoperative/restricted • Worn rings, piston, or cylinder
• Tank vent plugged or pinched • Worn valve guides or seals
• Engine flooded • Restricted breather
• Low compression (high cylinder leakage) • Air filter dirty or contaminated
• No spark (Spark plug fouled) ignition component
failure Low Compression
• Cylinder head gasket leak
Engine Does Not Turn Over • No valve clearance (cam wear)
• Dead battery • Cylinder or piston worn
• Starter motor does not turn • Piston rings worn, leaking, broken, or sticking
• Engine seized, rusted, or mechanical failure • Bent valve or stuck valve
• Valve spring broken or weak
Engine Runs But Will Not Idle • Valve not seating properly (bent or carbon
accumulated on sealing surface)
• Restricted fuel supply • Rocker arm sticking
• Low compression
• Crankcase breather restricted Backfiring
Engine Idles But Will Not Accelerate • Fouled spark plug or incorrect plug or plug gap
• Intake system air leaks
• Spark plug fouled/weak spark • Exhaust system air leaks
• Broken throttle cable • Valve sticking
• Obstruction in air intake • Ignition system faulty:
• Air box removed (reinstall all intake components) • Spark plug cap cracked / broken
• Incorrect ignition timing • Ignition coil faulty
• Restricted exhaust system • Ignition or kill switch circuit faulty
• Cam worn excessively • Poor connections in ignition system
Engine Has Low Power • Ignition timing incorrect
• Sheared flywheel key
• Spark plug fouled
• Cylinder, piston, ring, or valve wear or damage (check
compression)
• PVT not operating properly
• Restricted exhaust muffler
• Cam worn excessively
COOLING SYSTEM
Overheating
• Low coolant level
• Air in cooling system
• Wrong type/mix of coolant
• Faulty pressure cap or system leaks
• Restricted system (mud or debris in radiator fins
causing restriction to air flow, passages blocked in
radiator, lines, pump, or water jacket, accident
damage)
• Lean mixture (vents, fuel pump or fuel valve)
• Fuel pump output weak
• Electrical malfunction
• Water pump failure/ Loose impeller
• Thermistor failure
• Cooling fan inoperative or turning too slowly (perform
current draw test)
• Low oil level
• Spark plug incorrect heat range
• Faulty hot light circuit
• Thermostat stuck closed or not opening completely
• Radiator is missing its internal diverter plate not
allowing coolant to flow through entire radiator
Temperature Too Low
• Thermostat stuck open
Leak at Water Pump Weep Hole
• Faulty water pump mechanical seal (coolant leak)
• Faulty pump shaft oil seal (oil leak)
CHAPTER 4
FUEL SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
EFI OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
EFI SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
EFI SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
EFI SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
PRINCIPAL COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 4
EFI OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
INITIAL PRIMING / STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
EVAP SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
EVAP SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
EVAP CONDITIONS AND SYMPTOMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
ECU SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
ECU REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
ETC LEARN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.12
FUEL INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13
FUEL INJECTOR O-RINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13
FUEL INJECTOR TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.14
FUEL INJECTOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.14
FUEL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.15
FUEL LINES / TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.18
ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.18
FUEL VENT LINE ROUTING (NON HIGHLIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.19
FUEL VENT LINE ROUTING (HIGH LIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.21
VENT LINE TERMINATION FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.22
FUEL LINE QUICK CONNECT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.22
FUEL LINE REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.24
FUEL TANK REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.25
FUEL TANK INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.27
FUEL TANK REMOVAL RZR XP 4 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.28
FUEL TANK INSTALLATION RZR XP 4 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.29
FUEL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.31
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.31
FUEL SENDER TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.31
FUEL PUMP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.32
FUEL PUMP REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.32
TEMPERATURE AND MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR (T-MAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.36
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.36
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter - PV-48656
PART
TOOL DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
PU-43506-A Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit
PU-47471
Digital Wrench® SmartLink Module Kit 4
(PU-47470, PU-47469, PU-47468)
Digital Wrench®
PU-47470
PC Interface Cable
Digital Wrench® Digital Wrench® Diagnostic Software - PU-47063-B
PU-47469
Vehicle Interface Cable This dealer-only software installs on laptop computers
Digital Wrench® equipped with a CD drive and is designed to replace
PU-47468 multiple shop tools often used to test EFI components. It
SmartLink Module
also includes step-by-step diagnostic procedures to aid
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions: 1-800-345-2233 technician repair and troubleshooting.
or http://polaris.service-solutions.com/
NOTE
Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit - PU-43506-A
If the PC you are using is not equipped with a 9-pin
serial port, a USB to serial port adapter will be
necessary and may be purchased through Bosch
Service Solutions (PU-50621) or DSA at www.diagsys.
com
NOTE
The EFI fuel system remains under high pressure, even
when the engine is not running. Before attempting to
service any part of the fuel system, pressure should be
relieved. The Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit has an
integrated pressure relief valve that can be used to
bleed off pressure.
rail, maintain system operating pressure and return INITIAL PRIMING / STARTING PROCEDURE
excess fuel back into the fuel tank. At the engine, fuel fed
through the fuel rail supplies fuel to the injectors, which NOTE
inject into the intake ports. The ECU controls the amount
The injection system must be purged of all air prior to
of fuel by varying the length of time that the injectors are
the initial start up, and / or any time the system has
"on." This range can vary depending on fuel
been disassembled.
requirements. The controlled injection of the fuel occurs
every other crankshaft revolution, or once for each 4-
If the EFI system is completely empty of fuel or has been
stroke cycle. When the intake valve opens, the fuel/air
disassembled and repaired:
mixture is drawn into the combustion chamber, ignited
and burned. 1. Cycle the key switch from “OFF” to “ON” 6 times,
The ECU controls the amount of fuel being injected and waiting for approximately 3 seconds at each “ON”
the ignition timing by monitoring the primary sensor cycle to allow the fuel pump to cycle and shut down.
signals for intake air temperature, manifold absolute 2. Once step 1 is completed, turn the key switch to
pressure (load), engine temperature, engine speed “START” until the engine starts or 5 seconds has
(RPM) and throttle position. These primary signals are passed.
compared to the programming in the ECU computer chip,
and the ECU adjusts the fuel delivery and ignition timing 3. If the engine failed to start, repeat step 1 for 2 more
based on these values. cycles and attempt to start the engine.
If the engine fails to start, a problem may still exist,
During operation, the ECU has the ability to re-adjust
and should be diagnosed.
temporarily; providing compensation for changes in
overall engine condition and operating environment, so it
will be able to maintain the ideal air/fuel ratio.
NOTE
Accurate testing of EFI components is recommended
During certain operating periods such as cold starts,
utilizing the Digital Wrench® Diagnostic Software
warm up, acceleration, etc., a richer air / fuel ratio is
(dealer only).
automatically calculated by the ECU.
EVAP SYSTEM
EVAP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
An evaporative emission control system is a system that captures fuel tank vapors that would otherwise be vented to
the atmosphere. The EVAP system components consist of:
q Charcoal Canister: The charcoal canister is mounted near the fuel tank. Fuel vapors from the tank are routed to
and adsorbed by the canister’s charcoal granules. When the vehicle is running, vapors are drawn into the engine by
intake vacuum. The purge valve controls the movement of the vapors from the canister to the throttle body.
w Purge Valve: The purge valve is located near the throttle body and is controlled by the ECU. There are two hose
assemblies that connect the two purge ports to the expansion chamber. Each hose assembly has a check valve.
The check valve controls the flow of vapor so that it can only flow in one direction, toward the throttle bodies. The
purge valve must be installed with the arrow pointing rearward (the direction the air flows toward the engine during a
purge event).
e Fuel Cap: On EVAP equipped vehicles, the fuel cap will have a ratcheting style fuel cap with a tether. It is
important to note that Polaris does not use an enhanced EVAP control system. This means the system does not
detect a gross leak, or restrictions in the EVAP system such as a missing or loose fuel cap. No check engine light will
illuminate.
r Fuel Tank: The fuel tank has a built in rollover valve to prevent liquid fuel from entering the EVAP system in case
of an incident such as the vehicle being upside-down.
t Air Filter and Lines: Before incoming air can enter the charcoal canister, it needs to be filtered. This air filter is
located near the fuel tank. The vent line for the air filter is connected to a plastic fitting. The fitting is pressed into the
frame tube in the left rear fender well. It is important to note that the air filter is directional. If replacement is required,
be sure to follow the directional markings on the filter. The arrow marking on the air filter must point in the direction of
air flow during a purge event. There are two additional markings on the air filter: CAN (canister) and ATM
(atmosphere). The CAN side of the filter is closest to the charcoal canister, and the ATM side is the end where air
enters first. If the air filter becomes plugged or restricted, fuel vapors will not properly flow through the air filter to the
charcoal canister and purge valve. The EVAP lines are multi-layer formed lines that have low permeability. If a line
needs replacement, be sure to replace the line with its direct replacement. It is critical that all lines follow their
original routing and fastening points when replaced.
y Expansion Chamber: The expansion chamber equipped on some EVAP vehicles, helps smooth out purged
vapor/air mixture coming from the charcoal canister via the purge valve.
NOTE
Refer to this procedure and carefully follow all
instructions provided in Digital Wrench®.
RPM Limit:
RZR 900: 8300
RZR 1000: 8800
NOTE
Upon installing the ECU connector, you should hear a
“click” when the connector is fully closed.
FUEL INJECTORS
OPERATION OVERVIEW FUEL INJECTOR O-RINGS
The fuel rail q, located on the intake manifold, retains 1. Any time an injector is removed, you must replace the
the fuel injectors w to the intake assembly. O-rings on upper and lower O-rings.
both ends of the injectors prevent external fuel leaks and 2. Always lubricate NEW injector o-rings with clean,
also insulate the injectors from heat and vibration. silicone-free motor oil.
NOTE
Apply oil sparingly and avoid contaminating the pintle
valve / jet surface and upper inlet port.
IMPORTANT
Verify that the new top and bottom o-rings are installed
in the correct position and are lubricated with clean,
silicone-free oil.
4
7. Hold a shop towel over the fuel line fitting and
remove the fuel supply line t from the fuel rail.
9. Carefully pull up on the fuel rail u and injectors and 12. Install the new injector (s) into the fuel rail and
remove them from the throttle body as an assembly. reinstall the retaining clip.
Take care not to damage the fuel injector ends during
removal.
10. Pull out on the fuel injector retaining clip and pull the NOTE
injector out of the fuel rail. Repeat on the other Be sure the retaining clip is positioned on the injector
injector if removal is necessary. and fuel rail as shown above.
18. Use a tie strap to retain the harness leads to the fuel
rail.
19. Reconnect the negative battery cable and reinstall
the driver’s seat.
20. Turn key on to allow the fuel system to prime and
inspect the fuel rail and injectors for fuel leaks.
21. Reinstall the intake plenum assembly and fasten the TORQUE
lower mount to the transmission mount bracket.
Hose Clamps:
• Be sure the lower air box post is placed properly into 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
the rubber grommet h.
Intake Manifold Mount Screw:
22 ft-lb (30 Nm)
22. Reinstall the breather into the air box and tighten the
hose clamps retaining the air box to the throttle body
assembly.
23. Reinstall the two screws retaining the air box
assembly.
24. Position the intake hose onto the air box and tighten
the hose clamp.
4
25. Reinstall the cargo box access panel.
• Be sure the air box boots fully seat onto the dual
throttle body before tightening the hose clamps j.
4. Route the fuel vent line up behind the frame and 5. Route the fuel vent line through the shock mount and
secure vent line to the frame with two hinge clips e. attach the vent line to the fitting in the frame r.
4. Route the fuel vent line up along the frame and VENT LINE TERMINATION FITTING
secure vent line to the frame with three hinge clips e. This fitting should be inspected and tested using a Mity
Vac™ to ensure proper venting. Connect the Mity Vac to
the fitting and give it 5 pumps. The gauge should return
to 0 immediately or there is an obstruction.
5. Route the fuel vent line between the airbox and shock
mount.
6. Route the fuel vent line along the bottom of the
support tube.
7. Route the fuel vent line up along the outside of the NOTE
support tube and into the rear ROPS tube r.
If the vent line fitting is removed from the frame, it must
be replaced. The ears on the clip (arrows) will not hold
properly once it is removed.
1. Insert a #1 flat blade screw driver into the pry slot on 4. Gently pull outward on retaining tabs to unlock
the top of the retaining clip. retaining clip.
4
IMPORTANT CAUTION
To prevent damage to the retaining clip, be sure to use Do not over-pry or excessively bend the retaining tabs.
a flat blade screwdriver that fits into the pry slot. This can damage the retaining clip, and require
replacement of the fuel line assembly.
2. Gently pry the retaining clip upwards into the open
position. 5. Push retaining clip upward into the open position.
3. Remove quick connect from the fuel fitting. 6. Remove quick connect from the fuel fitting.
Indicators that the quick connect is damaged, and FUEL LINE REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
assembly replacement is needed:
1. The retaining clip can be closed without the insertion
of a hard line end. The retaining clip is designed to
lock only when a hard line end has been fully
inserted.
2. Retaining tabs are deformed and no longer lock into
the body of the quick connect.
5. Place the fuel line back over the fitting and slide the 3. While holding a shop towel over the fuel line
green connector locking mechanism back into place. connectors, disconnect the fuel supply line q from
Verify the connector tabs snap back into place. the pump (see Chapter 2 – Fuel Lines, page 2.41 for
specific removal procedure).
6. Be sure fuel line is routed and retained properly.
6. Remove the fastener t retaining the seat belt 9. Remove the two bolts u and two T40 Torx screws o
mechanism to the frame near the right rear portion of retaining the front of the seat base frame and two
the fuel tank. Once removed, place the mechanism rear bolts i. Remove the rear seat base assembly
in the rear cargo box to keep it out of the way. from the vehicle.
7. Remove the shift knob y using a flat blade 10. Remove the T-40 Torx screw a retaining the fuel
screwdriver and T25 Torx driver. Remove the Torx tank strap to the seat base frame. Remove the strap
screws retaining the center console. Remove the from the other side of the seat base frame as well.
console from the vehicle.
12. Remove the nuts f retaining the regulator and Torx 2. Reinstall the fuel tank bracket and fasteners.
screws g retaining the fuse box.
3. Install the vent line.
4. Reinstall block-off panel. Secure with plastic rivets
and torque screws to specification.
TORQUE
Block-off Panel Screws
8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
TORQUE
Regulator/Fuse Box fasteners
5 ft-lb (7 Nm)
FUEL TANK INSTALLATION 13. Install both seats and test the fuel pump by turning
1. Carefully reinstall the fuel tank assembly. Install the the ignition key on and listening for the pump to
inner tank bracket with the fuel tank to ensure the activate. Check the fuel line fittings for leaks.
bracket is inserted properly into the lower fuel tank
mount.
WARNING
Always wear safety goggles when working with high
pressure or flammable fluids. Failure to do so could
result in serious injury or complications.
NOTE
Syphon as much fuel from the tank as possible before
attempting to remove it from the vehicle.
NOTE
9. Remove the T-40 Torx screw y retaining the fuel tank
A small amount of fuel may come out of the fuel lines or strap to the seat base frame. Remove the strap from
pump fitting. Properly drain fuel into a suitable the other side of the seat base frame as well.
container.
4
FUEL TANK INSTALLATION RZR XP 4 1000
1. Carefully reinstall the fuel tank assembly. Install the
11. Remove the nuts o retaining the regulator and bolts
inner tank bracket with the fuel tank to ensure the
a retaining the fuse box. bracket is inserted properly into the lower fuel tank
mount.
2. Reinstall the fuel tank bracket and fasteners.
3. Install the vent line.
4. Reinstall lower rear close-off panel. Secure with
plastic rivets and torque screws to specification.
TORQUE
Block-off Panel Screws
8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
TORQUE TORQUE
Seat Belt Mechanism Bolt: Battery Bracket:
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm) 8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
10. Reinstall right rocker panel and all previously 13. Install seats and test the fuel pump by turning the
removed fasteners. ignition key on and listening for the pump to activate.
11. Reconnect the fuel line and fuel pump electrical Check the fuel line fittings for leaks.
harness. Verify connections are secure.
12. Reinstall the battery and battery bracket. Torque
fastener to specification.
FUEL PUMP
OPERATION OVERVIEW • If the engine fails to start.
An electric fuel pump assembly is used to transfer fuel to • If the engine is stopped with the key switch "on" (as in
the EFI system from inside the fuel tank. This assembly the case of an accident).
includes the fuel pump, fuel filters, regulator and fuel
In these situations, the “check engine” light will go on, but
gauge sender. The pump is rated for a minimum output
will turn off after 4 cranking revolutions if system function
of 25 liters per hour at 58 ± 2 psi (400 ± 14 kPa) and has
is OK. Once the engine is running, the fuel pump remains
two non-serviceable fuel filters.
on.
# POSITION READING
FUEL PUMP TEST 7. If the reading is between 7 and 14 volts, turn key
If a fuel delivery problem is suspected, make certain the switch off and connect an ohmmeter between
fuel pump filters are not plugged, that the pump is being terminals “3” and “4”' at the white fuel pump
activated through the ECU, all electrical connections are connector to check for continuity within the fuel
properly secured, the fuses are good, and a minimum of pump.
7.0 volts is being supplied. If during starting the battery
NOTE
voltage drops below 7.0 volts, the ECU will fail to operate
the system. If there was no continuity between the pump terminals,
replace the fuel pump assembly.
NOTE
A minimum of 10 volts is needed to properly run the fuel 8. If voltage at the plug was within the specified range,
pump. and there was continuity across the pump terminals,
reconnect the plug to the fuel pump, making sure you
have a clean connection. Turn on the key switch and
WARNING listen for the pump to activate.
Fuel is extremely flammable and may cause severe NOTE
burns, injury, or death. Do not use any device that
If the pump starts, repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 to verify
produces a flame or electrical devices that may spark
correct pressure.
around fuel or fuel vapors.
9. If the pump still does not operate, check for correct
1. Remove the passenger seat from the vehicle.
ECU operation by plugging in a known-good ECU of
2. Cover the fuel line connection at the fuel tank with a the same model.
shop towel and disconnect the line from the fuel
pump outlet. NOTE
If the pump still does not operate, replace the fuel pump
3. Install the Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter (PV-48656)
assembly.
in-line between the fuel pump outlet and fuel line.
4. Connect the hose from the Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit
(PU-43506-A) to the test valve on the Fuel Pressure
Gauge Adapter (PV-48656). Route clear hose into a
FUEL PUMP REPLACEMENT
portable gasoline container or the vehicle’s fuel tank. 1. Move the vehicle to a well ventilated area. Shift the
transmission into Park and turn the ignition key off.
5. Turn on key switch to activate the pump and check
the system pressure on the gauge. If system 2. Remove the passenger seat to access the fuel
pressure is within specifications, the ignition switch, pump.
ECU, fuel pump, and pressure regulator are working
properly. Turn the key switch off and depress the WARNING
valve button on the tester to relieve the system Always wear safety goggles when working with high
pressure. pressure or flammable fluids. Failure to do so could
Fuel Pressure: result in serious injury or complications.
58 ± 2 psi (400 ± 14 kPa)
NOTE
If the fuel pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pump assembly.
3. Be sure the top of the fuel tank is clean q. If it 6. Disconnect the fuel pump electrical harness e.
requires cleaning, hand wash the top of the tank to
ensure no debris will enter the fuel system when the
fuel pump is removed.
4
7. Place the Fuel Pump Service Tool (PU-50326) over
the fuel pump PFA nut r. Using a 1/2” drive ratchet
or breaker bar, loosen and remove the PFA nut.
Discard the PFA nut.
WARNING
Failure to clean area around fuel pump may lead to
debris entering the fuel tank during service. Excessive
debris in fuel tank may cause premature wear of fuel
pump and/or clogging of internal fuel filters.
CAUTION
It is possible for pressurized fuel to be present when NOTE
disconnecting the fuel line.It is recommended to allow
the vehicle to sit for a period of one hour after shutting Apply downward force on the fuel pump flange while
off the engine before servicing the fuel pump. This removing the fuel pump PFA nut.
allows the exhaust to cool and fuel pressure to drop.
NOTE
A small amount of fuel may come out of the fuel lines or
pump fitting. Properly drain fuel into a suitable
container.
8. Carefully lift the fuel pump out of the fuel tank. As the 11. Remove new fuel pump assembly t , gasket y and
fuel pump assembly is being removed, be aware of PFA nut u from packaging. Use care not to bend
float arm and pump pre-filter. Hold the float arm to float arm i during un-packaging. Do not lift or carry
the pump body as you lift and tilt the pump to ensure fuel pump assembly by the float arm.
that the float arm is not bent when removed from the
tank.
16. Roughly align orientation mark on fuel pump 18. Torque PFA nut to specification using the Fuel Pump
between the orientation marks on fuel tank to ensure Service Tool (PU-50326) and a calibrated torque
float arm does not get bent or snagged. wrench.
TORQUE
Fuel Pump PFA Nut:
70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
NOTE
Be sure to engage the retainers on each fuel line until 4
each snaps into place. Pull on fuel lines lightly to
confirm connection.
WARNING 21. Install the fuel tank vent line onto the tank fitting.
Failure to align the orientation marks may lead to 22. Connect the fuel pump electrical harness.
interferences with the fuel level float armand cause
incorrect function. 23. Test the fuel pump by turning on the key and
listening for the pump to activate. Cycle the key
17. While maintaining downward pressure, thread new several times to prime the system.
PFA nut onto fuel tank and hand tighten. Use care 24. Install the passenger seat / storage box.
when starting PFA nut, ensuring threads are properly
aligned. Verify orientation marks are still aligned
between fuel pump and fuel tank.
NOTE
This sensor should only be tested using Digital
Wrench® Diagnostic Software (dealer only).
CPS REPLACEMENT 3. Unclip the wire harness retainer e and remove the
1. If not done already; disconnect the CPS harness CPS harness from the retainer to allow replacement.
connector (see Chapter 4 – CPS Test, page 4.37). 4. Install new sensor using a light coating of oil on the
2. Using an 8mm socket, remove the CPS retaining bolt O-ring to aid installation.
q and remove the sensor w from the stator cover. 5. Torque the CPS retaining bolt to specification.
TORQUE
CPS Retaining Bolt:
9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
NOTE
DO NOT attempt to service the ETC q. The ETC is a
non-serviceable component and can only be tested
using Digital Wrench®. If the ETC is faulty, the entire
assembly must be replaced.
THROTTLE BODY REMOVAL 6. Disconnect the wire harness from the ETC r and
1. Remove the cargo box assembly (See Chapter 10 – the TMAP t located on the ends of the throttle body
Cargo Box Assembly Removal, page 10.23). assembly.
TORQUE
Fuel Rail Mounting Screws:
44 in-lb (5 Nm)
ETC TEST 3. Remove the four bolts retaining the ETC housing to
Never attempt to disassemble the ETC assembly. intake plenum.
Warranty is void if the end cover is opened or tampered 4. Remove the ETC housing and gasket from intake
with in any way. plenum.
All operating and control functions within the ETC are 5. Reverse these steps for installation. Torque the ETC
pre-set. No internal servicing or adjustments may be housing retaining bolts and intake boot clamp to
performed. If a problem is encountered, and you specification.
determine the ETC to be faulty, contact the Polaris
Service Department for specific handling instructions. Do TORQUE
not replace the ETC without factory authorization.
ETC Housing Retaining Bolts:
Use Digital Wrench® to perform all troubleshooting of 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
this component. Use a Volt Ohm meter to test the vehicle
harness continuity between the ETC connector and ECU Intake Boot Clamp:
connector. Refer to the wire diagram for pin-out details. If 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
the ETC is faulty, the entire ETC assembly must be
replaced (see ETC / Throttle Body Replacement, page
4
).
ETC LEARN PROCEDURE
If code P1227 is being set, verify the following:
1. Check power supply voltage on pin for Pedal IMPORTANT
2. Verify voltage at pedal for supply line. Troubleshoot
wiring This procedure MUST be performed on the vehicle
3. Check the pedal for sensor/physical damage (circuit whenever the ECU is replaced or reflashed or the
fault). Troubleshoot pedal 1 and 2 vs each other throttle body is replaced.
(depending on faults)
1. After the reflash / ECU replacement / throttle body
ETC REPLACEMENT change, leave the key on (engine not running) for 60
seconds. Do NOT crank the engine during this time.
1. Remove the cargo box access panel. 2. Turn the key off and wait 3 minutes. During this time,
2. Remove wire harness from the ETC q. the ECU will write values into memory and then
completely shut down.
3. Turn key back on and start the vehicle. The vehicle
should operate normally.
4. If the procedure was interrupted at any time, start
back at step 1.
3. Remove the three fasteners e retaining the throttle 5. Remove the pedal assembly from the vehicle.
pedal assembly to the frame support. PPS Installation
6. Place the throttle pedal assembly and protective
shield on the mounting studs and loosely install the
three fasteners.
7. Torque the three mounting bolts to specification and
connect the PPS harness connection.
TORQUE
Throttle Pedal Mounting fasteners:
18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
OXYGEN SENSOR
OXYGEN SENSOR INFORMATION 2017+
The oxygen sensor, located on the exhaust pipe before CONNECTOR WIRE PIN AND WIRE
the muffler, uses a 4 wire heated element. PIN COLOR CONNECTION
A Gray Sensor Ground
2015–2016
B Black Sensor Output
CONNECTOR WIRE PIN AND WIRE C White Heater Power
PIN COLOR CONNECTION
D White Heater Ground
A Purple Heater Power
B White Heater Ground
C Gray Sensor Output
D Black Sensor Ground
NOTE
This test MUST be performed with the sensor at room
temperature.
First, verify if there are any stored codes for the oxygen
sensor.
NOTE
The ECU must first run though the O2 sensor time
delay before a trouble code will be set. This may take
several minutes at idle to occur.
EFI DIAGNOSTICS
TROUBLE CODE DISPLAY (DTC) 3. A set of three numbers will appear in the information
area.
NOTE • The first number (located far left) can range from 0 to
The diagnostic mode is accessible only when the check 9. This number represents the total number of trouble
engine MIL has been activated. code present (example: 2 means there are 3 codes
present).
• The second number (located top right) can be 2 to 6
Use the following procedure to display diagnostic trouble
digits in length. This number equates to the suspected
codes that were activated during current ignition cycle
area of fault (SPN).
causing the MIL to illuminate. Diagnostic trouble codes
• The third number (located bottom right) can be 1 to 2
will remain stored in the gauge (even if MIL turns off) until
digits in length. This number equates to the fault mode
the key is turned off.
(FMI).
NOTE
If there is a diagnostic problem with the power steering
system, the power steering MIL will illuminate and blink
in place of the check engine MIL.
CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTION One the key is cycled, the trouble code (s) will show
current but there will be no fuel injector deactivation or
NOTE throttle limitation unless the misfiring continues to occur.
The check engine light will remain illuminated until there
This process only applies to some MY15 and later
models. are 4000 engine revolutions (i. e. 4000 RPM for one
minute) without a significant misfire being detected.
Refer to this procedure only if one of the codes shown Once this condition is met, the check engine light will turn
below is displayed in Digital Wrench.
off and the code(s) will show as historic.
The ECU monitors crankshaft speed via the crankshaft If a misfire code has been set and there is no observed
position sensor. A misfire will cause a fluctuation in misfire, cycle the key and allow 4000 engine revolutions
crankshaft speed. A code will set and turn on the check to see if the check engine light turns off. If it does not turn
engine light after an engine misfire threshold/rate is off, diagnose by verifying the following items:
detected that is above a pre-determined limit. This • Low battery voltage (loose connection, low charge,
threshold varies based on engine speed. bad battery)
One or more of the following codes will be set if a misfire • Faulty voltage regulator
occurs: • Ignition Coil and connections are good 4
• Spark plugs wires are secure
• P0301 (SPN 65591/FMI 7) Misfire Detected, Cylinder • The correct spark plugs are installed and the plugs are
1 (MAG) not fouled
• P0302 (SPN 65592/FMI 7) Misfire Detected, Cylinder • Crankshaft Position Sensor tests good
2 (PTO) • Wiring to the Crankshaft Position Sensor, ECU and
• P0314 (SPN 65590/FMI 7) Misfire Detected, Cylinder Ignition Coil are not damaged. Chassis ground is clean
Not Identified and tight
• Fuel pressure is within specification
Once a cylinder misfire code is set, the following events • Fresh/good quality fuel is in the fuel tank
will occur: • Engine mechanical is good (leak down, timing)
• Check Engine Light illuminates • Confirm the belt is in good condition, specifically
• If the cylinder can be detected by the ECU (code looking for signs of hour-glassing
P0301 or P0302), the ECU will deactivate the fuel • Confirm primary clutch operation (worn/incorrect
injector for that cylinder. This will remain in effect until weights, loose spider/jam nut)
the key is cycled off and back on. • Confirm secondary clutch operation (sliders, rollers,
• If the cylinder with the misfire cannot be detected helix)
(code P0314), the ECU will limit available power by
limiting how far the throttle plate opens.
EFI TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom: Idle Too High (if > 1400 RPM when warm).
Fuel Starvation / Lean Mixture • Throttle stop screw tampering
Symptoms: Hard start or no start, bog, backfire, popping • Throttle cable sticking, improperly adjusted, routed
through intake / exhaust, hesitation, detonation, low incorrectly
power, spark plug erosion, engine runs hot, surging, high • Faulty electrical connection
idle, idle speed erratic.
Symptom: Idle Too Low (if < 1100 RPM when warm).
• No fuel in tank
• Plugged air filter
• Restricted tank vent, or routed improperly
• Fuel lines or fuel injectors restricted • Leaking injector (rich condition)
• Belt dragging
• Fuel filter plugged
• Throttle stop screw tampering
• Fuel pump inoperative
• Air leak in system Symptom: Erratic Idle.
• Intake air leak (throttle shaft, intake ducts, air box
cover) • Throttle cable incorrectly adjusted
• Air Leaks, dirty injector
Rich Mixture • TMAP damaged (check with Digital Wrench®)
Symptoms: Fouls spark plugs, black, sooty exhaust • Tight valves (low compression or high leakdown)
smoke, rough idle, poor fuel economy, engine runs • Ignition timing incorrect
rough/ misses, poor performance, bog, engine loads up, • Belt dragging
backfire. • Dirty air filter
• High percentage of cylinder leakdown (worn engine)
• Air intake restricted (inspect intake duct) • Low compression (worn engine)
• Air filter dirty/plugged • Spark plug(s) fouled
• Poor fuel quality (old fuel) • Spark plug wires loose or worn
• Fouled spark plug • Faulty electrical connection
• Injector failure
Poor Idle
NOTE
You must already have the current version installed
before adding an update. Updates will not install if you
are using an older version loaded on your PC.
3. If a newer update is available, it should be
downloaded before using Digital Wrench® (see
6. If the update file date listed is newer than your
Chapter 4).
current version and update (see Chapter 4 to
download the file.
7. Click on the link shown above, save the file to your DIGITAL WRENCH® COMMUNICATION
hard disk and then double-click the icon to start the ERRORS
update process.
If you experience problems connecting to a vehicle or
NOTE any Digital Wrench® related problem, visit the Digital
Wrench® Knowledge Base for the most current
Do not "run" or "open" the file from where they are. troubleshooting information, FAQs, downloads and
Select "save" and download them to your PC before software updates at: http://polaris.diagsys.com/.
running the install.
NOTE
Versions and updates are subject to change.
DIGITAL WRENCH® - DIAGNOSTIC Follow these steps to connect the diagnostic interface
CONNECTOR cable to the vehicle to allow Digital Wrench® use:
Located under the hood connected to a sealed plug q. 1. Assemble the SmartLink Module and attach the PC
Interface Cable to your laptop.
2. Remove the protective cap from the Digital Wrench®
connector.
3. Connect the Vehicle Interface Cable to the Digital
Wrench® diagnostic connector.
4. Turn the ignition key to the ‘ON’ position, select the
appropriate vehicle and wait for the status to display
‘Connected’ in the lower left corner of the screen.
5. Once connected, proceed with using Digital
Wrench®.
NOTE
Failure to follow the reprogramming instructions
completely and correctly can result in an engine that
does not run! Replacement ECUs are programmed as
“no-start” and require a reflash for them to work.
• DON’T DISTURB THE PC: While reprogramming is in
Reprogramming (Reflash) Tips: progress, don’t move the mouse and don’t touch the
keyboard. The process only takes a few minutes, and
is best left alone until complete.
Reprogramming (Reflash) Procedure:
If you are not familiar with the reprogramming process, 7. Select the file you want to load into the ECU then
review the “Reprogramming (Reflash) Tips” before you click the “Continue” icon to proceed to the Integrity
begin. Follow the on-screen instructions as you progress Check and obtain a Request Code.
through the steps. If you encounter a problem, always
check the On-Line help for current tips and information.
1. Verify the most current update has been downloaded
and loaded into Digital Wrench®. Digital Wrench
Software Version and Update ID, page 4.56
2. Connect SmartLink Module cables to PC and
vehicle.
3. Open the Digital Wrench® program.
4. Select the model year, product line and vehicle
description by selecting the “Change Vehicle Type” 8. Copy (CTRL +C) the Request Code that will be
icon. required on the dealer website in the next step. DO
NOT CLOSE Digital Wrench® or the Request Code
will be invalid. NOTE: All characters are letters;
there are no numbers in a request code.
NOTE
6. Select “Engine Controller Reprogramming”. Request Codes and Authorization Keys must be
entered EXACTLY as they appear on the screen.
10. Enter or paste the Request Code into the box. 13. Enter or paste the Authorization Key in the box
located on the Digital Wrench® screen. Click the
‘Continue’ button and follow instructions provided on
the screen to complete reprogramming procedure.
11. Select the same file type from the list that you
14. At this point the reflash process will begin. Do not
selected previously while in Digital Wrench®. Enter
the VIN along with the customer’s name and touch the vehicle or PC during the process. 4
address. When completed, click the Authorize button
once to proceed.
CHAPTER 5
PVT SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
SPECIAL TOOLS AND SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
RZR XP 4 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
RZR XP 4 1000 HIGH LIFTER CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
RZR XP 1000 LE GOLD METALLIC CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
PVT SYSTEM OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
GENERAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
DRIVE CLUTCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
DRIVEN CLUTCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
5
PVT BREAK-IN (DRIVE BELT / CLUTCHES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
MAINTENANCE / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
PVT OVERHEATING / DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
PVT SYSTEM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
XP / XP4 PVT COVERS AND DUCTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
PVT COVERS AND DUCTING COMPONENTS (HIGH LIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
PVT DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
PVT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.13
BELT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.13
BELT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.14
BELT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.14
PVT BREAK-IN (DRIVE BELT / CLUTCHES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.14
DRIVE CLUTCH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.15
DRIVE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.15
DRIVE CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
NEEDLE BEARING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.17
SHIFT WEIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.18
BUTTON TO TOWER CLEARANCE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.18
SPIDER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.19
ROLLER, PIN, AND THRUST WASHER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.19
CLUTCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.20
MOVEABLE SHEAVE BUSHING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.21
BUSHING SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.21
DRIVE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.23
DRIVEN CLUTCH SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.26
DRIVEN CLUTCH SLIDER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.26
DRIVEN CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.26
DRIVEN CLUTCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.28
DRIVEN CLUTCH ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.30
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.31
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.31
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS AND SUPPLIES RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION ALTITUDE SHIFT DRIVE DRIVEN
MODEL METERS (FEET) WEIGHT SPRING SPRING
2872085 Drive Clutch Puller 0-1800 29-75,PM
(0-6000) (5633720) Black / Red Black
2871056 Driven Clutch Puller XP 1000 (7044263) (7044708)
1800-3700 29-68,PM
9314177 Clutch Holding Wrench (6000-12000) (5139618 )
NOTE
Using High gear for heavy loads, hilly terrain, sand/dune environments, or in wet, muddy conditions will increase the
chance of drive belt damage.
WARNING
NOTE
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be
sure machine is secure before beginning this service For MY16 models, if the driven clutch will not
procedure. disengage, a commercially found 2–Jaw puller may be
used. Only pull from inside the slider pockets. Pulling
3. Remove the left rear wheel. on the sheaves may cause damage to the clutch.
4. Remove the lower mounting bolt and nut q from the
left rear shock. Discard the nut.
5. Swing shock outward toward the front of the vehicle.
6. Loosen the hose clamp attaching PVT intake hose to
the outer clutch cover and disengage the hose from
the outer clutch cover.
7. Remove the eight clutch cover screws w and remove
the outer clutch cover from the vehicle.
12. Remove the drive clutch retaining bolt and remove 14. Remove the seven bolts r that retain inner clutch
the drive clutch using Drive Clutch Puller. cover to engine and transmission. Remove inner
clutch cover.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct Drive Clutch Puller to prevent
damage to crankshaft.
13. Remove the four push rivets that secure the upper
guard plate to the top of the inner PVT cover. Make
note of the routing of the fuel lines, vent line, battery
cable and wire harness for proper assembly.
PVT ASSEMBLY 6. Install the protective cover and the four push rivets
that secure the cover to the top of the inner PVT
1. Inspect inner clutch cover. Replace if cracked or cover.
damaged.
2. Inspect the seal on the transmission input shaft.
Replace if damaged.
3. Inspect inner clutch cover seal q (engine side).
Replace if cracked, torn or damaged.
TORQUE
Drive Clutch Retaining Bolt:
96 ft-lb (130 Nm)
11. Clean the splines inside the driven clutch and on the
transmission input shaft.
12. Apply a light film of grease to the splines on the shaft.
13. Install the driven clutch, washer and retaining bolt.
Torque to specification.
TORQUE
Driven Clutch Retaining Bolt:
55 ft-lb (75 Nm)
TORQUE
Outer Clutch Cover Retaining Screws:
48 in-lb (5 Nm)
17. Install inlet and outlet ducts and tighten hose clamps.
18. Install the left rear shock lower mounting bolt and the
left rear wheel. Torque fasteners to specification.
TORQUE
Rear Shock Mounting Bolt:
70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
TORQUE
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
DRIVE BELT
BELT REMOVAL 4. Insert clutch spreader tool w (2877408 or 2878925)
into the driven clutch as shown (tool included with
NOTE vehicle’s tool kit).
Inspect the entire clutch outlet duct (including the outlet NOTE
duct screen) when replacing a drive belt. Remove any
debris found in the outlet duct or outlet duct screen q. Make sure the tool is square with the moveable sheave
surface of the driven clutch.
NOTE
Removal of left rear wheel or left rear shock is NOT
necessary for belt replacement.
2. Rotate the driven clutch and walk the belt into the
clutch.
3. Remove the clutch spreader tool from driven clutch
4. Rotate / spin the driven clutch and belt approximately
5-7 times to properly seat the belt in the driven
clutch.
5. Install the outer clutch cover and eight screws.
Torque screws to specification.
TORQUE
Outer Clutch Cover Retaining Screws:
48 in-lb (5 Nm)
DRIVE CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY / 4. Inspect cover bushing q. The outer cover bushing is
INSPECTION manufactured with a Teflon™ coating. Wear is
determined by the amount of Teflon™ remaining on
the bushing.
WARNING
The clutch assembly is a precisely balanced unit. Never
replace parts with used parts from another clutch
assembly!
NOTE
The drive clutch spring is one of the most critical
The clutch bearing is a one-way bearing.
components of the PVT system. It is also one of the
easiest to service. Due to the severe relaxation the
spring is subject to during operation, it should always 2. Verify there is no binding or rough spots. If problems
be inspected for tolerance limits during any clutch are noted continue with disassembly.
operation diagnosis or repair.
Check to see that spring coils are parallel to one
another using a straight-edge. Distortion of the
spring indicates stress fatigue, requiring
replacement.
MEASUREMENT
Button to Tower Clearance:
.000-.012″ (.000-.304 mm)
WARNING
The clutch assembly is a precisely balanced unit. Never 2. Inspect the tower sheave surfaces. Replace the drive
replace parts with used parts from another clutch clutch if worn, damaged or cracked.
assembly!
NOTE
A damaged shift weight is usually caused by a
damaged or stuck roller in the spider assembly. See
“Drive Clutch Roller Pin and Button Service”.
5
Clutch Spider Nut Socket: PU-50578
Clutch Holding Fixture: PN 2871358-B
NOTE
2. Loosen and remove the spider e (counterclockwise) Rollers, pins, thrust washers and buttons are not
using Clutch Spider Removal / Installation Tool r. serviceable at the time of this publication.
MEASUREMENT
Shaft Diameter:
Standard: 1.3725 - 1.3712″
(34.8615 - 34.8488 mm)
Service Limit: 1.3704″ (34.8088 mm)
MEASUREMENT
Thrust Washer Thickness:
Standard: .030″ (.76 mm)
Service Limit: .025″ (.64 mm)
NOTE
Bushings are installed at the factory using Loctite® 648. 6. With towers pointing toward the vise, slide sheave
In order to remove bushings it will be necessary to onto puller rod.
apply heat evenly to the area around each bushing. 7. Install removal tool (Item A, B) into center of sheave
Clean all residual Loctite® from bushing bore prior to with “A side” toward sheave.
installing new bushing.
NOTE
CAUTION Use Bushing Tool PA-47336.
Clutch components will be hot! In order to avoid serious 8. Install nut (C) onto end of puller rod and hand
burns, wear insulated gloves during the removal tighten. Turn puller barrel to increase tension on
process. sheave if needed. Using a hand held propane torch,
apply heat around outside of bushing until tiny
Moveable Sheave - Bushing Removal smoke tailings appear.
1. Remove clutch as outlined previously in this chapter. 9. Turn sheave counterclockwise on puller rod until it
2. Install handle end of the Piston Pin Puller securely comes free. Lift sheave off puller.
into bench vise and lightly grease puller threads. 10. Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.
Piston Pin Puller: 2870386 11. Pull bushing removal tool and adapter from puller
rod. Remove bushing from tool and discard.
3. Remove nut from puller rod and set aside. Moveable Sheave - Bushing Installation
4. Install puller adapter a from kit PN 2871226. 12. Place main adapter i on puller.
13. Apply Loctite® 648 evenly to bushing bore inside 31. Working from inside of cover, insert new bushing and
moveable sheave. bushing installation tool into center of clutch cover.
14. Set bushing in place on sheave. 32. With main adapter on puller, insert cover onto puller
rod, placing outside of cover toward vise.
15. Insert installation puller tool (Item A/B) with “A” side
down, into center of bushing. 33. Install nut on rod and hand tighten. Turn puller barrel
to apply more tension if needed.
16. With towers pointing upward, slide sheave, bushing
and tool onto puller rod. 34. Turn clutch cover counterclockwise on puller rod until
bushing is seated.
17. Install nut on puller rod and hand tighten. Turn barrel
to apply additional tension if needed. 35. Remove nut from puller rod. Take installation tool
and clutch cover off rod.
18. Turn sheave counterclockwise, making sure bushing
is drawn straight into bore. Continue until bushing is
seated. DRIVE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
19. Remove nut from puller rod and set aside. CAUTION
20. Remove sheave from puller. Do not apply oil or grease to the bushings.
21. Remove installation tool.
Reassemble the drive clutch in the following sequence.
Cover Bushing Removal
22. Install main adapter i on puller.
Be sure marks that were made during disassembly are
aligned during each phase of assembly.
5
2. Install the non-braking needle bearing q, the two 6. Install clutch onto holding fixture and secure in a
washers w and the spacer r onto the stationary bench vice. Tighten the spider o using Clutch Spider
sheave e. Tool a. Torque spider to specification.
TORQUE 11. Install the drive clutch cover h. Be sure all marks are
in alignment.
Spider Jam Nut:
250 ft-lb (339 Nm)(Apply 0.1 mL Loctite® 7088
Primer and 0.1 mL Loctite® 620™) in 90° apart to the
threads of the spider jam nut.
NOTE
If the marks illustrated below are not in alignment upon
assembly, the clutch will not be in balance and the drive
clutch assembly must be replaced.
TORQUE 5
Drive Clutch Cover Bolts:
9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
CAUTION
DO NOT reassemble the drive clutch without the limiter
spacer. Belt life will be greatly reduced.
Slider Width w:
Service Limit: 0.975″ (24.8 mm)
4. Spin the compressor down until it just starts to 7. Remove the E-clips r, washers t, and the clutch
contact the helix cover. Remove the four screws q rollers y. Inspect the rollers for wear; replace if worn.
that secure the cam (helix) assembly using a T25
Torx driver.
CAUTION 5
The helix cover is loaded by the spring. Not using a
proper compressor may result in personal injury or
damage to the clutch.
NOTE
Spring is compression only and has no torsional wind.
10. Separate the stationary sheave from the moveable 3. Install the spring pins r to retain the slider pins.
sheave. Note the X’s a on the stationary and fixed
sheaves for reassembly.
CAUTION 5
The helix cover is loaded by the spring. Not using a
proper compressor may result in personal injury or
damage to the clutch.
TORQUE
Helix Retaining Screws:
48 in-lb (5 Nm)
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
SITUATION PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY
Worn or broken drive clutch spring. Replace with recommended spring.
Engine RPM Install correct shift weight kit to match engine
Drive clutch shift weight too heavy.
below specified application.
operating range, Driven clutch spring worn out or broken. Replace spring; refer to proper installation
although engine location.
is properly tuned.
Worn driven clutch sliders Disassemble driven clutch; inspect sliders for
wear.
Disassemble drive clutch; inspect shift weights
for wear and free operation.
Drive clutch binding. Clean and polish stationary shaft hub;
reassemble clutch without spring to determine
Erratic engine problem area.
operating RPM
during Belt worn unevenly - thin / burnt spots. Replace belt.
acceleration or
load variations.
Replace sliders. 5
Inspect helix.
Driven clutch malfunction.
Inspect movable sheave for excessive bushing
clearance.
Sheave face grooved. Replace the clutch.
Incorrect drive clutch spring (too high of Install correct recommended spring.
rate).
Drive clutch shift weights incorrect for Install correct recommended shift weights.
application (too light).
Disassemble and clean clutch, inspecting shift
Engine RPM weights and rollers. Reassemble without the
above specified Drive clutch binding.
spring and move sheaves through entire range
operating range. to further determine probable cause.
Disassemble, clean, and inspect driven clutch,
Driven clutch binding. noting worn sheave bushing and helix/roller
wear
Converter sheaves greasy; belt slipping. Clean sheaves with denatured alcohol or brake
cleaner, install new belt.
Harsh drive clutch Drive belt worn too narrow. Replace belt.
engagement. Wrong drive clutch spring installed Replace spring with correct one
Drive belt turns Wrong belt for application. Replace with correct belt.
over
Abuse (continued throttle application when Caution operator to operate machine within
vehicle is stationary, excess load) guidelines.
Belt burnt, thin Dragging brake Inspect brake system.
spots
Slow, easy clutch engagement Fast, effective use of throttle for efficient
engagement.
CHAPTER 6
TRANSMISSION
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
SHIFT LEVER / CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
SHIFT LEVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
SHIFT LEVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
SHIFT LEVER REMOVAL (GOLD METALLIC LE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
SPHERICAL BEARING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
SHIFT LEVER INSTALLATION (GOLD METALLIC LE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
GATED SHIFTER ADJUSTMENT (GOLD METALLIC LE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
SHIFT CABLE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
SHIFT CABLE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
TRANSMISSION SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 6
TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
TRANSMISSION VENT LINE ROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.14
TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.14
DIFFERENTIAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL BUSHING REPLACEMENT (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . .6.23
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25
GEAR / SHAFT / BEARING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.26
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY / SNORKEL GEAR BACKLASH PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.33
SHIFTING DIFFICULTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.33
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION
PA-50231 Snorkel Tool
2871698
Rear Output Seal Driver
(Part of 2871702 Kit)
2871699
(Part of 2871702 Kit) Rear Driveshaft Seal Guide
LUBRICATION
FLUID CAPACITY
Recommended Transmission Lubricant:
AGL
Capacity (Standard):
44 oz (1300 mL)
Capacity (INT’L):
40.5 oz (1200 mL)
4. Remove the retaining clip u from the shifter. SHIFT LEVER INSTALLATION (GOLD
METALLIC LE)
1. Add Loctite 603 on completely around the outer
surface of the spherical bearing. Install the spherical
bearing into the shift lever.
NOTE
The spherical bearing orientation inside the shift lever is
important for proper function. Note the alignment o of
the marks in the spherical bearing with the marking on
the shift lever
IMPORTANT
After the snap ring is installed, you should be able to
move the spherical bearing with your finger tip. If the
bearing will not move, it should be replaced.
6. The gap between the shifter guide and the gated 8. Install the shifter boot t, spacer r, shift knob e,
plate should be the same on both sides. retaining screw w and shift knob cover q.
IMPORTANT
The shift lever must be in Reverse when performing this
inspection.
4. The gap between the shifter guide y and the gated TORQUE
plate u should be the same on both sides.
Gated Shifter Bracket Fasteners:
14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
NOTE
The center console is not shown for visual purposes.
This work may be performed with the center console
installed.
5. If the gaps are not equal, loosen the four bracket bolts
i. Move the bracket until the gaps are equal and
tighten the fasteners to specification.
TRANSMISSION SERVICE
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL CAUTION
CAUTION Correct Drive Clutch Puller P/N 2872085
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be
sure machine is secure before beginning this
procedure. Always wear eye protection.
NOTE
Be sure to use the correct Drive Clutch Puller (PN
2872085) to prevent damage to crankshaft.
13. Remove the four bolts (w attaching the upper and 16. Place a spacer or support between the vehicle frame
lower radius rods to the bearing carriers (left and and engine to hold the engine up in position.
right side). Discard nuts and replace with new upon
assembly. Allow the radius rods swing downward.
20. Using a 15mm socket, remove the four bolts from the 23. Slide transmission towards the rear of the vehicle.
left side o and right side a, securing the Lift and rotate the top of the transmission towards the
transmission to the engine. left side of the vehicle. With the help of an assistant,
remove transmission from the left rear wheel well
area.
TORQUE
Rear Transmission Isolator Fasteners w:
40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
HOLE YEAR VEHICLE DESCRIPTION 10. Torque left side mounting bolts to specification in
5 2015-18 RANGER Diesel sequence.
14. Install and properly route the gear position switch 20. Install inner clutch cover, outlet duct, drive clutch,
connector t, speed sensor connector y, crankshaft driven clutch, belt and outer clutch cover (see
position sensor connector u, shift bracket and shift Chapter 5 – PVT Assembly, page 5.11).
bracket bolts i, shift cable clevis pin and washer o 21. Install new spring ring a on rear drive shafts. Apply
onto the transmission. an anti-seize compound to the splines s.
15. Torque the two shift cable bracket bolts to 22. Swing the rear trailing arm out and up. Align the
specification. splines of the drive shaft with the transmission
splines. Push inward on the trailing arm assembly
TORQUE until the rear drive shafts lock into the transmission
Shift Cable Bracket Bolts: splines.
23. Install the rear shocks onto the trailing arms and
6
17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
install the lower mounting bolts with new retaining
nuts. Torque to specification.
16. Install three wire ties to retain wire harness to
transmission and mounts. TORQUE
Rear Shock Lower Bolt:
70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
24. Install the four rear radius rods to the bearing carriers
on each side. Use new retaining fasteners d. Torque
to specification.
25. Install the stabilizer bar link mounting bolts and new TRANSMISSION VENT LINE ROUTING
nuts f. Torque to specification. The transmission vent line connects to a nipple q on the
side of the transmission near the transmission switch.
The vent line routes up through the gap between the
MAG and PTO intake runners and is retained by a clip w
mounted to the cargo box rear bracket.
TORQUE
Stabilizer Bar Linkage:
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
The line runs parallel with the fuel supply line and is
26. Safely lower the vehicle. retained by a zip tie e attached to the cargo box front
27. If transmission lubricant was drained, fill the bracket. The line terminates to open air (does not
transmission with the specified amount of Polaris terminate to a fitting or hole in the frame).
AGL (see Chapter 2 – Transmission Lubrication,
page 2.48).
FLUID CAPACITY
Recommended Transmission Lubricant:
AGL
Capacity (Standard):
44 oz (1300 mL)
Capacity (INT’L):
40.5 oz (1200 mL)
TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY
NOTE
Refer to the exploded view at the end of this chapter as
a reference.
3. Remove the bell crank nut q and bell crank w. 11. Remove all the transmission case bolts. Using suit-
able pry bars, remove the cover using the designated
pry points (indicated by the black arrows in the illus-
tration below).
12. Lift up on the shift shaft rail j and move the rail
assembly rearward to allow the shift fork pins k to be
removed from the shift drum l. Remove the shift
drum from the transmission housing.
NOTE
Note the timing marks on the shift gears for reassembly
purposes.
13. Remove the shift shaft rail j and shift forks from the 17. Using a 5 mm Allen wrench, remove the screws that
transmission housing as an assembly. secure the pinion shaft assembly 2#. Lift the pinion
shaft assembly straight up to remove it from the
housing. Note the longer screw 2 $ that locks the
snorkel tube.
19. Remove the bearing from the reverse shaft using a 23. If necessary, disassemble the other end of the
bearing puller. Remove the retaining ring and slide reverse shaft. Remove the bearing , engagement
the washers, high gear and needle bearing off the dog, retaining ring, washer, low gear d and needle
reverse shaft. bearing f from the reverse shaft.
CAUTION
Use caution when disassembling the shift rail. The
compressed springs on the shift rail may pop off
causing eye or face injury.
Snorkel Shaft Removal / Disassembly 27. Remove the snorkel tube and shaft assembly from
the transmission case.
CAUTION
The pinion shaft must be removed prior to removing the
snorkel shaft assembly. Failure to remove pinion shaft,
will result in damage to the snorkel shaft.
26. Using the Snorkel Tool, fully loosen the snorkel tube.
Snorkel Tool:
PA-50231
DIFFERENTIAL OPERATION
6
Transmissions equipped with Turf Mode have two
traction operational modes: Differential Lock and
Differential Unlock. Locking the rear differential is
beneficial in low traction and rough terrain conditions.
Unlocking the rear differential makes maneuvering easier
and minimizes damage to terrain.
6
ITEM DESCRIPTION
u Engagement Dog
i Bearing
a Torsion Spring
s Retainer
d Shift Fork
f Solenoid Spring
g Solenoid
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY 3. Remove the six planet gears and each side gear
(TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) assembly from the ring gear.
NOTE
If the gearcase is completely assembled, perform the
Transmission Disassembly, page procedure.
4. Inspect the female side gear (A), male side gear (B),
planet gears (C) and ring gear (D). Replace
components or bushings as needed. Bushing
replacement can be performed on all necessary
differential components. If bushing replacement is
required, proceed to Planetary Differential Bushing
Replacement (Turf Mode Models Only), page 6.23.
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL BUSHING 4. Install the bushing to the specified depth as shown.
REPLACEMENT (TURF MODE MODELS
ONLY)
NOTE
If the differential is completely assembled, perform the
“Planetary Differential Disassembly” procedure.
7. Press the new bushing into the planet gear until it is 11. Install the bushing to the specified depth as shown.
flush on each end. Repeat this procedure for the
remaining planet gears.
14. Press the new bushing into the side gear until it 5. Install screws hand tight. Place assembly in soft jaw
bottoms out. vise and torque to specification.
TORQUE
Differential Cover Screws (10.9 Fastener):28 ft-lbs (38
Nm)
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY / SNORKEL 4. Apply a small amount of white lithium grease or Anti-
GEAR BACKLASH PROCEDURE Seize on the threads i of the snorkel tube.
REF DESCRIPTION
q Seal
w Snap Ring
e Washer
r Bearing
Snorkel Tool
t Snorkel Tube PA-50231
y Snorkel Shaft
u 13T Gear
2. After the 13T gear and bearing are pressed onto the
snorkel shaft (flush to the shoulder), install the
washer and new retaining ring.
3. Press the gear back towards the retaining ring. Avoid
excessive force so the retaining ring is not damaged
or pre-stressed significantly.
NOTE
Failure to press the gear back against the washer and
retaining ring will lead to a gear backlash change after
vehicle is placed into service.
6. Inspect the pinion shaft assembly. Replace bearings 9. Using a 5 mm Allen wrench, install only the three
if needed. Inspect each gear for damage, chips or screws h that secure the pinion shaft assembly as
abnormally worn teeth. shown below. Leave the longer locking screw j out
at this point. Torque the bearing cover retaining
screws to specification.
TORQUE
REF DESCRIPTION Bearing Cover Retaining Screws:
10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
o Bearing
11. Look down into the transmission housing to see the 16. Assemble the reverse shaft assembly and input shaft
snorkel locking screw hole opening k to reference assembly if previously disassembled (see
your starting point. illustrations).
NOTE
If you have a hard time seeing into the hole, insert a
small Allen wrench, punch or screwdriver into the hole
to feel when the notch is aligned with the hole.
17. Install the idler gear shaft assembly 2&, gear cluster 20. Install the shift shaft rail 3! and shift forks into the
assembly 2*, and input shaft assembly 2 ( into the transmission housing as an assembly. Be sure the
transmission housing, all at the same time. shift forks are engaged into the engagement dogs.
NOTE
Both shift forks need to be orientated the same way, so
that the shift fork pins are both offset to the same side
of the rail.
23. Apply a continuous bead of Crankcase 3 Bond 25. Install new seals into the transmission case halves.
Sealant to left-hand transmission mating surface. • The snorkel shaft seal 3#, should be pressed in until it
Crankcase 3 Bond Sealant seats against the housing counter-bore.
PN 2871557
28. Install the spacer and then the detent star onto the
shift drum shaft. Be sure to install the detent star with
the raised edge facing outward and skip-tooth
aligned.
29. Install the detent pawl onto the shift shaft and 35. Install the bellcrank onto the shift shaft. Note the key
carefully install the compression spring. splined on the bellcrank and shift shaft. Install the nut
and torque to specification.
TORQUE
Bell Crank Nut:
18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
TORQUE
Fill / Drain Plug:
14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
TROUBLESHOOTING
SHIFTING DIFFICULTY
Check the following items when shifting difficulty is
encountered.
• Shift cable adjustment/condition
• PVT alignment (clutch center distance)
• Idle speed (throttle cable routing)
• Transmission lubricant type/quality
• Loose fasteners on sector gear cover
• Worn rod ends, clevis pins, or pivot arm bushings
• Shift selector rail travel
• Worn, broken or damaged internal transmission
components
NOTE
To determine if shifting difficulty or problem is caused
by an internal transmission problem, isolate the
transmission by disconnecting the shift cable end from
the transmission bellcrank. Manually select each gear
range at the transmission bellcrank, and test ride
vehicle. If it functions properly, the problem is outside
the transmission.
NOTES
CHAPTER 7
FINAL DRIVE
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
BEARING CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
FRONT BEARING CARRIER INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
FRONT BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
FRONT BEARING CARRIER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
REAR BEARING CARRIER INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
REAR BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
REAR BEARING CARRIER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.12
REAR DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.13
REAR DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.14
DRIVE SHAFT / CV JOINT HANDLING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.16
CV JOINT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.16
OUTER CV BOOT REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.16
INNER PLUNGING JOINT / BOOT REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.18 7
PROP SHAFT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.20
FRONT PROPSHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.20
REAR PROP SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.21
REAR PROP SHAFT REMOVAL XP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.22
SUPPORT BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.23
U-JOINT DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.24
U-JOINT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.24
FRONT PROP SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.25
REAR PROP SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.25
REAR PROP SHAFT INSTALLATION XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.26
FRONT GEARCASE / CENTRALIZED HILLIARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.27
FRONT GEARCASE ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.27
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.28
AWD DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.28
FRONT GEARCASE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.30
FRONT GEARCASE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.30
FRONT GEARCASE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.33
FRONT GEARCASE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.36
FRONT GEARCASE VENT LINE ROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.36
WHEEL HUBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.37
FRONT HUB ASSEMBLY VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.37
REAR HUB ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.37
BEADLOCK RIMS (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.38
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION
2872608 Roll Pin Removal Tool
CV Boot Clamp Pliers
8700226 (earless type)
BEARING CARRIER
FRONT BEARING CARRIER INSPECTION / 6. Remove and discard the two front brake caliper
REMOVAL mounting bolts and remove the caliper from the
brake disc.
1. Elevate front of vehicle and safely support machine
under the frame area. CAUTION
WARNING Do not hang the caliper by the brake line. Use wire to
hang caliper to prevent damage to the brake line.
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be
sure machine is secure before beginning this service 7. Remove the front wheel hub assembly.
procedure. Wear eye protection when removing
bearings and seals. 8. Remove and discard the upper and lower ball joint
pinch bolts r.
2. Check bearings for side play by grasping the top and
bottom of the tire firmly and checking for movement.
The tire should rotate smoothly without binding or
rough spots.
CAUTION
Use an arbor and press only on the outer race,
otherwise bearing damage may occur.
TORQUE
Ball Joint Pinch Bolts:
42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
8. Torque the tie rod end fastener t to specification
4. Apply Anti-Seize to drive shaft axle splines. and install a new cotter pin t. 7
5. Install front wheel hub assembly w, cone washer(s)
TORQUE
e, and hand tighten the castle nut. Install washers
with domed side out. Tie Rod End Fastener:
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) + 90°
TORQUE
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts:
TORQUE
30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
Wheel Hub Castle Nut:
180 ft-lbs (244 Nm)
10. Install wheel and four wheel nuts. Torque wheel nuts REAR BEARING CARRIER INSPECTION /
to specification. REMOVAL
TORQUE 1. Elevate rear of vehicle and safely support machine
under the frame area.
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm) WARNING
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be
11. Rotate wheel and check for smooth operation. sure machine is secure before beginning this service
procedure. Wear eye protection when removing
bearings and seals.
6. Remove the two brake caliper mounting bolts t. 9. Remove the bearing carrier from the rear drive shaft
Remove the rear brake caliper assembly. and trailing arm.
CAUTION
Use an arbor and press only on the outer race,
otherwise bearing damage may occur.
REAR BEARING CARRIER INSTALLATION 4. Install rear wheel hub assembly w, cone washers e,
1. Install drive shaft through the backside of the bearing and hand tighten the castle nut. Install washers with
carrier. domed side out.
2. Install the four fasteners q that attach the rear 5. Install the rear brake caliper assembly and new bolts
bearing carrier to the trailing arm. Install the one r. Torque to specification.
fastener w that attaches the upper radius rod to the
bearing carrier. Torque bolts to specification.
NOTE
Use new nuts upon installation of the rear bearing
carrier.
TORQUE
Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts:
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
TORQUE
Bearing Carrier to Trailing Arm Bolts:
42 ft-lb (54 Nm)
TORQUE
Hub Castle Nut:
110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
TORQUE
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL 6. Remove and discard the upper and lower ball joint
1. Elevate front of vehicle and safely support machine pinch bolts r and nuts.
under the frame area.
CAUTION
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be
sure machine is secure before beginning this service
procedure. Wear eye protection when removing
bearings and seals.
CAUTION 9. With a short, sharp jerk, remove drive shaft from the
Do not hang the caliper by the brake line. Use wire to front gearcase.
hang caliper to prevent damage to the brake line.
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION 5. Install new pinch bolts and nuts e. Torque to
1. Install new spring ring q on drive shaft. Apply an specification.
anti-seize compound to the splines w.
TORQUE
2. Align splines of drive shaft with front gearcase and
reinstall the drive shaft. Use a rubber mallet to tap on Ball Joint Pinch Bolts:
the outboard end of the drive shaft if necessary 42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
4. Install the upper and lower ball joint ends into the
front bearing carrier.
8. Torque wheel hub nut y to specification and install a 3. Remove the cotter pin q and loosen the rear wheel
new cotter pin u. Tighten nut slightly if necessary to hub castle nut w. Remove the nut, and cone washer
align cotter pin holes. Bend both ends of cotter pin (s) e from the rear wheel hub assembly.
around end of spindle in different directions.
CAUTION
New bolts have a pre-applied locking agent which is
destroyed upon removal. Always use new brake caliper
mounting bolts upon assembly.
10. Install wheel and four wheel nuts. Torque wheel nuts
to specification.
TORQUE
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
6. Remove the rear hub assembly from the bearing
11. Rotate wheel and check for smooth operation. carrier.
7. Support the trailing arm from underneath.
REAR DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL
8. Remove the lower shock mounting bolt and nut y.
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Swing the shock inward. Discard the nut.
CAUTION 9. Remove the stabilizer bar mounting bolt, washer and
nut u. Discard the nut.
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be
sure machine is secure before beginning this 10. Lift the trailing arm assembly upward so the rear
procedure. Always wear eye protection. drive shaft is parallel with the ground.
11. Leaving the drive shaft in the transmission, swing the
2. Remove the four wheel nuts and rear wheel. rear trailing arm assembly outward until it is free from
the rear drive shaft.
12. Lower the trailing arm. 2. Align splines of drive shaft with transmission splines
and reinstall the drive shaft. Use a rubber mallet to
tap on the outboard end of the drive shaft if
necessary.
13. With a short, sharp jerk, remove drive shaft from the
transmission splines.
TORQUE
Lower Shock Bolt to Trailing Arm:
70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
7. Install rear wheel hub assembly e. Install the cone 9. Install the rear brake caliper assembly and new bolts
washer (s) r and castle nut. Torque castle nut to y. Torque to specification.
specification. Install new cotter pin t.
TORQUE
Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts:
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
10. Install wheel and four wheel nuts. Torque wheel nuts
to specification.
TORQUE
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
7
TORQUE
Rear Hub Castle Nut:
180 ft-lbs (244 Nm)
CAUTION
Complete disassembly of the CV joint is NOT
recommended. The internal components are precision
fit and develop their own characteristic wear patterns.
Intermixing the internal components could result in
looseness, binding, and/or premature failure of the joint.
IMPORTANT
If the grease in the joint is obviously contaminated with
water and/or dirt, the joint should be replaced.
4. The CV joint is fitted with a circlip at the end of the 11. While pulling out on the CV shaft, fully extend the CV
shaft inside the housing. The shaft is likely to be joint and slide a straight O-ring pick or a small slotted
damaged from striking the cage / race to separate the screw driver between the small end of the boot and
CV joint from the shaft. It is recommended to replace the shaft. This will allow the air pressure to equalize in
the entire half shaft assembly if there is damage to the CV boot in the position that the joint will spend
the outer joint. most of its life. Before you remove your instrument,
5. Remove the plunging joint from the shaft to remove be sure the small end of the boot is in its correct
the CV boot. location on the shaft.
6. Slide the boot clamp and boot (large end first) onto 12. Install and tighten the small clamp r on the boot
the plunging joint end of the drive shaft and position using the appropriate clamp tool.
the boot in it’s groove machined in the shaft.
7. Grease the joint with the special CV joint grease
provided in the boot replacement kit. Fill the cavity
behind the balls and the splined hole in the joint’s
inner race. Pack the ball tracks and outer face flush
with grease. Place any remaining grease into the
boot.
CAUTION
The grease provided in the replacement kit is specially
formulated for wear resistance and durability. DO NOT
use substitutes or mix with other lubricants.
NOTE
The amount of grease provided in the boot kit is pre-
measured. Use entire contents of package.
IMPORTANT
If the grease in the joint is obviously contaminated with
water and/or dirt, the joint should be replaced.
11. Slide the small boot clamp and boot (small end first) 18. Install and tighten the large clamp e using the
onto the drive shaft and position the boot in its groove appropriate clamp tool.
machined in the shaft.
12. Install the cage / ball assembly on the shaft and install
a new snap ring on the end of the shaft.
13. Grease the joint with the special CV joint grease
provided in the boot replacement kit. Fill the cavity
behind the balls and the splined hole in the joint’s
inner race. Pack the ball tracks and outer face flush
with grease. Place any remaining grease into the
boot.
CAUTION
The grease provided in the replacement kit is specially
formulated for wear resistance and durability. DO NOT
use substitutes or mix with other lubricants.
NOTE
Axle Boot Clamp Tool: PU-48951
The amount of grease provided in the boot kit is pre- or
measured. Use entire contents of package.
CV Boot Clamp Pliers: 8700226
14. Slide the joint and shaft into the housing.
19. Pull out on the drive shaft to center the joint in the
housing. Slide a straight O-ring pick or a small slotted
screw driver between the large end of the boot and
the joint housing and lift up to equalize the air
pressure in the boot.
20. Position the boot lip in its groove. Install and tighten
the small clamp r using the appropriate clamp tool.
7
CAUTION
DO NOT hammer on the joint to install it in the housing.
15. Install the large circlip into the groove of the plunging
joint housing.
16. Remove excess grease from the CV joint's external
surfaces and place the excess grease in the boot.
17. Pull the boot over the joint and position the boot lips
into the grooves on the joint housing and shaft. Make
sure the boot is not dimpled or collapsed.
NOTE
Right front wheel can be removed to gain better access
to the propshaft roll pin.
REAR PROP SHAFT REMOVAL 4. Once the front and rear prop shafts have been
1. Remove the center console. separated, slide the rear prop shaft forward to
remove it from the transmission output shaft.
7. Slide the prop shaft to the rear of the vehicle until the
front of the shaft clears the frame support and slide
the prop shaft forward out of the vehicle.
NOTE
3. Using a commercially available 2-jaw puller, remove Only drive on the inner race of the bearing. Driving on
the bearing from the end of the prop shaft. the bearing in any other location will damage the
bearing.
4. Clean the bearing mounting surface on the shaft and
apply Loctite® 603™ retaining compound to the
clean surface. 7. Wipe the bearing and shaft clean of any excess
retaining compound.
NOTE
7
Do not allow any Loctite® to get in the bearing.
U-JOINT ASSEMBLY
1. Install new bearing caps in yoke by hand. Carefully
install U-joint cross. Tighten vise or use a press to
NOTE force bearing caps in.
If yoke or bearing is removed, cross bearing must be 2. Using a suitable arbor, fully seat bearing cap in one
replaced. Note orientation of grease fitting (if equipped) side. Continually check for free movement of bearing
and mark inner and outer yoke for correct re-positioning cross as bearing caps are assembled.
during installation.
3. Install snap ring to contain bearing cap just installed.
Repeat procedure for other side.
2. Support inner yoke as shown and drive outer yoke
down (bearing cap out) with a suitable press. 4. Install outer yoke, aligning marks made before
disassembly.
5. Repeat Steps 1-3 to install bearing caps on outer
yoke.
6. Seat all bearing caps against snap rings.
7. When installation is complete, yokes must pivot
freely in all directions without binding. If the joint is
stiff or binding, tap the yoke lightly to center the joint
until it pivots freely in all directions.
NOTE
Paint marks are applied to the front and rear prop shafts
to aid shaft alignment. Reference these marks during
installation if still visible.
NOTE
Paint marks are applied to the front and rear prop shafts
to aid shaft alignment. Reference these marks during
installation if still visible.
TORQUE
Support Bearing Fasteners:
35 ft-lb (47 Nm)
7
q Seal s Ring Gear
w Cover Plate d Spring
e AWD Coil f Output Hub
r Backlash Spacer g Bearing
t Nylon Spacer h Gearcase Housing
j Drain Plug
y Armature Plate 10 ft-lbs (14 Nm)
CAUTION
Switching to AWD while the rear wheels are spinning
may cause severe drive shaft and gearcase damage.
Always switch to AWD while the rear wheels have
traction or are at rest.
AWD DIAGNOSIS
With the AWD switch off, the vehicle drives through the
rear wheels only (2 wheel drive). When the AWD is Symptom: AWD Will Not Engage
enabled, the front drive acts as an on-demand AWD 1. Check the gearcase coil resistance. To test the coil
system. This means, the front drive will engage once the resistance, measure between the power wire q (GY)
rear wheels have lost traction, and will remain engaged and ground wire w (BN/WH). Measurement should
until the torque requirement goes away (i.e. rear wheels be within specification.
regain traction).
AWD Engagement: When the AWD switch is activated,
the AWD coil is powered by a 12 Vdc input which creates
a magnetic field. This magnetic field attracts an armature
plate q that is keyed to the roll cage w. When the ring
gear e and roll cage are spinning (vehicle is moving),
the energized coil and armature plate will apply drag to
the roll cage that indexes the rollers inside the ring gear
to an engagement position. While in the engagement
position, the front drive will be in an “over-running”
condition (not engaged), until the rear wheels lose
traction. Once the rear wheels begin to lose traction, the
front drive will engage by coupling the output hubs r to
the ring gear via the rollers. The front drive will remain
engaged until the torque requirement goes away (i. e.
rear wheels regain traction).
AWD Disengagement: Once the rear wheels regain Front Gearcase Coil Resistance:
traction, the front wheels will return to the “over-running” 21 - 27 Ω
condition. The vehicle is now back to rear wheel drive
until the next loss of rear wheel traction occurs. 2. Turn on ignition and AWD switches and place gear
selector in High or Low. Check for minimum battery
Torsion Spring Operation: The torsion spring t acts
voltage at Gray and Brown/White chassis wires that
as a return mechanism to help disengage the coupling of
power the coil. Should have a minimum of 11 Vdc.
the output hubs and ring gear by creating an “over-
running” condition for the rollers upon disengagement. 3. If electrical tests are within specification, remove
gearcase (see Chapter 7 – Front Gearcase
Removal, page 7.30) and inspect components.
4. Inspect armature plate e for a consistent wear 6. Inspect the roller surface on the inside of the ring
pattern. There should be two distinct wear bands r. gear for gouging/rough spots.
If only one band of wear is present (or if there is wear
between the two bands), inspect the coil area as
indicated in Step 5. A wear band with an interrupted
wear mark may indicate a warped plate, which may
cause intermittent operation.
3. Remove the LH output hub assembly e from the 5. Remove the torsion spring retainer t and torsion
clutch housing or outer cover plate assembly. spring y from the top of the ring gear.
NOTE
Nylon spacer is non-serviceable and should not be
removed.
7. Remove the RH output hub assembly i from the 10. Inspect the AWD coil d located in the outer cover
gearcase housing. plate assembly. Refer to AWD Diagnosis, page 7.28
for detailed inspection process. Replace the cover
plate seal f and O-ring g.
NOTE
Rollers are spring loaded. Take care not to allow them
to fall out or lose them upon removal of the roll cage.
NOTE
Refer to the “Electronic Parts Catalog” for individual
part availability. Most parts are to be replaced as an
assembly or as a complete kit.
14. Inspect the roll cage assembly j sliding surfaces FRONT GEARCASE ASSEMBLY
and H-springs l. The sliding surfaces must be clean 1. As mentioned during gearcase disassembly section,
and free of nicks, burrs or scratches. If damaged, replace all O-rings, seals and worn components.
replace the roll cage assembly.
2. Install pinion shaft assembly and install internal snap
ring.
NOTE
If bearing replacement was required, press new bearing
onto the pinion shaft and install a new external snap
ring.
7
4. Install the RH output hub w into the gearcase
housing.
5. Carefully install the rollers e into the roll cage 7. Align spring retainer dowel pin t with ring gear
assembly while installing the assembly into the dowel pin y and install the retainer on top of the
clutch housing. torsion spring.
9. Install armature plate u. Be sure all of the armature 12. Carefully install the LH output hub assembly o into
plate tabs are fully engaged into the roll cage the cover plate. Take care not to damage the new
assembly and that it is resting properly on the torsion cover plate seal while installing the output hub.
spring retainer.
10. Carefully install the ring gear and roll cage assembly
i into the gearcase housing.
NOTE
Be sure the square O-ring is placed flat on the cover
surface. If the O-ring is twisted fluid leakage may occur.
TORQUE
Cover Plate Screws:
9 ft-lbs (12 Nm)
WHEEL HUBS
FRONT HUB ASSEMBLY VIEW
TORQUE
Beadlock Screws:
Step 1: 24 in-lbs (3 Nm)Step 2: 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
NOTE
Beadlock bolts should be checked and torqued every
300 miles (450 km).
CHAPTER 8
STEERING / SUSPENSION
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
MULTI-FUNCTION PLIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
STEERING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
UPPER STEERING SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
POWER STEERING UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
LOWER STEERING SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
LOWER STEERING SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
POWER STEERING UNIT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
UPPER STEERING SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10
STEERING SHAFT BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.11
FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.12
FRONT A-ARM REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.12
FRONT STABILIZER BAR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.13
FRONT STABILIZER BAR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.14
BALL JOINT SERVICE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.15
BALL JOINT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.15
BALL JOINT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.15
REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.16
RADIUS ROD REMOVAL / INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.16 8
TRAILING ARM REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.16
TRAILING ARM SPHERICAL BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.19
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.20
REAR STABILIZER BAR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.21
STABILIZER BAR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.21
SHOCKS / SPRINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.22
SHOCK ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.22
SHOCK REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.22
SHOCK / SPRING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.22
SHOCK SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.23
WALKER EVANS SHOCK SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.23
WALKER EVANS™ 2.0" FRONT SHOCK / 2.5" REAR SHOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.23
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.24
FRONT SHOCK SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.24
REAR SHOCK SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.26
SPRING ADJUSTMENT (WALKER EVANS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.28
WALKER EVANS™ SHOCK REBUILD INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.29
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.29
VALVE SHIM ARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.29
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS
PART
TOOL DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
2200421 Gas Shock Recharging Kit
Shock Spring Preload Spanner
2878925 Wrench (Walker Evans™)
2876389 Multi-Function Pliers
Spanner Wrench - 2.5″ / 3.0″ Inner
PU-51829 Internal Bypass (FOX)
Spanner Wrench - 2.5″ Outer Internal
PU-51830 Bypass (FOX)
Spanner Wrench - 3.0″ Outer Internal
PU-51832 Bypass (FOX)
PU-51837 Shock Body Holding Tool (2.5″) (FOX)
PU-51838 Shock Body Bolding Tool (3.0″) (FOX)
MULTI-FUNCTION PLIERS
Included in the tool kit, the multi-function pliers is
designed to remove the plastic push rivets used to fasten
body components.
STEERING SYSTEM
STEERING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEW
e Steering Wheel a Steering Shaft to EPS Fasteners k Steering Shaft to Rack Fasteners
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) 42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
l Tie Rod End Fasteners (Do not
r Steering Shaft Bushings s EPS Unit reuse)
30 ft-lb (41 Nm) + 90°
1( Steering Rack Mounting Nuts
t Pivot Tube d EPS Cover 16 ft-lbs (22 Nm)
y Pivot Tube Fasteners f EPS Cover Fasteners 2) Steering Rack
8 ft-lb (11 Nm) 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
UPPER STEERING SHAFT REMOVAL 4. Remove the steering shaft, pivot tube and steering
1. Remove the two Torx fasteners q retaining the black wheel from the vehicle as an assembly.
plastic cover and remove the cover from the vehicle.
8
3. Lift the steering wheel up and remove the four
fasteners t that retain the pivot tube.
3. Loosen the nut and back it half way off the steering 3. Remove the pinch bolt w retaining the lower steering
shaft. shaft to the power steering unit .
4. Place the assembly in a vise.
5. Using a large bronze drift and hammer, strike the
steering shaft nut to pop the steering wheel off the
shaft taper.
IMPORTANT
Electronic Power Steering (EPS) units are programmed
to be vehicle specific and are not interchangeable
between product lines.
POWER STEERING UNIT INSTALLATION 5. Torque the four mount bracket nuts y to
1. If the power steering unit q was removed from the specification.
mount bracket w, reinstall it prior to vehicle
installation. Torque the mounting bolts e to
specification.
TORQUE
Power Steering Unit Mount Bracket Nuts:
16 ft-lb (22 Nm)
NOTE
Power Steering Unit Fasteners: 6. Proceed to Upper Steering Shaft Installation, page
30 ft-lb (41 Nm) 8.10 to complete the installation procedure.
TORQUE
Lower Steering Shaft to EPS Unit Pinch Bolt:
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
UPPER STEERING SHAFT INSTALLATION 5. Install a new upper steering shaft pinch bolt and nut.
Torque pinch bolt to specification.
NOTE
TORQUE
If steering wheel was removed, follow this procedure to
ensure the upper steering shaft is properly positioned Upper Steering Shaft Pinch Bolt:
on the power steering stub shaft. 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
1. Install the upper steering shaft and align the skip- 8. Turn the key switch on and test EPS operation.
tooth spline q on the power steering stub shaft with
the opening w in the upper steering shaft.
TORQUE
Pivot Tube Fasteners:
8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
4. Note the order and location of the washers and 10. Install the steering wheel and hand tighten the nut.
spacers between the steering wheel and pivot tube. Apply Loctite® 271™.
5. Drive the bearings out of the pivot tube using a drift 11. Reinstall the steering shaft assembly in the vehicle.
punch. Install the lower portion of the steering shaft onto the
steering gear box assembly (see Figure 5-16).
6. Inspect the pivot tube bearing surfaces for signs of Torque the lower pinch bolt to specification.
excessive wear or damage.
TORQUE
7. Apply Loctite® 271™ (Red) to the outer
circumference of the new lower bearing race. Slide Lower Steering Pinch Bolt:
the new lower bearing onto the steering shaft and 42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
install the steering shaft through the pivot tube. Be
sure the lower washers and spacers are still on the 12. Install the two fasteners that retain the pivot tube
steering shaft. (see Figure 5-17). Torque fasteners to specification.
TORQUE
Pivot Tube Bolts:
8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
TORQUE
Tilt Shock Bolt:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
FRONT SUSPENSION
FRONT A-ARM REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT 7. Loosen and remove the upper A-arm front through-
The following procedure details upper and lower A-arm bolt fastener e and rear though-bolt fastener r.
removal and replacement on one side of the vehicle. Remove the upper A-arm from the vehicle.
Upper A-Arm
1. Elevate and safely support the front of the vehicle
and remove the front wheel.
2. Remove lower shock fastener q from upper A-arm.
WARNING
The locking agent on the existing bolts was destroyed
3. Remove the nut retaining the front stabilizer bar link during removal. DO NOT reuse old hardware. Serious
to the upper control arm. injury or death could result if fasteners come loose
during operation.
4. Remove upper ball joint pinch bolt w from bearing
carrier.
9. If not replacing the A-arm, thoroughly clean the A-
arm and pivot tube.
10. Install new ball joint into A-arm. Refer to “Ball Joint
Replacement” section.
11. Insert new A-arm bushings and pivot tube into new
A-arm.
12. Install new upper A-arm assembly onto vehicle
frame. Torque new bolt to specification.
TORQUE
Front Upper A-arm Bolts:
42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
13. Insert upper A-arm ball joint end into the bearing
5. Using a soft face hammer, tap on bearing carrier to
carrier. Install upper ball joint pinch bolt into the
loosen the upper A-arm ball joint end while lifting
bearing carrier and torque bolt to specification.
upward on the upper A-arm. Completely remove the
ball joint end from the bearing carrier. TORQUE
6. Remove the front bumper to allow A-arm bolt Front Ball Joint Pinch Bolts:
removal. 42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
14. Install the nut retaining the front stabilizer bar link to 19. Examine A-arm bushings and pivot tube. Replace if
the upper control arm.. Torque fasteners to worn. Discard hardware.
specification.
20. If not replacing the A-arm, thoroughly clean the A-
TORQUE arm and pivot tube.
Stabilizer Bar Link Fasteners: 21. Install new ball joint into A-arm. Refer to “Ball Joint
40 ft-lb (54 Nm) Replacement” section.
22. Insert new A-arm bushings and pivot tube into new
15. Attach shock to A-arm with fastener. Torque lower A-arm. A light press force may be needed.
shock bolt to specification.
23. Install new lower A-arm assembly onto vehicle
TORQUE frame. Torque new bolt to specification.
Front Shock Mounting Bolts: 24. Insert lower A-arm ball joint end into the bearing
42 ft-lbs (57 Nm) carrier. Install lower ball joint pinch bolt into the
bearing carrier and torque bolt to specification.
WARNING
Lower A-Arm
16. Remove lower ball joint pinch bolt t from bearing Upon A-arm installation, test vehicle at low speeds
carrier. before putting into service.
TORQUE
Lower A-arm Bolts:
42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
TORQUE
Front Ball Joint Fasteners:
42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
REAR SUSPENSION
RADIUS ROD REMOVAL / INSTALLATION 8. Reverse this procedure to reinstall the radius rods.
The following procedure details upper and lower radius 9. Torque all fasteners to specification.
rod removal and replacement on one side of the vehicle.
Repeat the following steps to remove the A-arm from the NOTE
opposite side. Use new attaching nuts upon installation of the rear
1. Raise and support vehicle by main frame. radius rods.
WARNING TORQUE
Serious injury or death may result if machine tips or Inner Radius Rod Mounting Bolts:
falls. Be sure machine is secure before beginning this
50 ft-lb (68 Nm) + 45°
service procedure.
Outer Radius Rod Mounting Bolts:
50 ft-lbs (68 Nm) + 90°
2. Remove the rear wheel nuts and rear wheel.
3. Identify / mark radius rods “upper” and “lower”.
WARNING
4. Remove the nut, bolt and washer q & w attaching
the upper and lower radius rod to the bearing carrier. Upon radius rod installation, test vehicle at low speeds
Discard the nuts. before putting into service.
WARNING
Serious injury or death may result if machine tips or
falls. Be sure machine is secure before beginning this
service procedure.
5. Remove bolts e & r attaching radius rods to the
vehicle frame. Discard the nuts.
2. Remove the four wheel nuts and remove the rear
wheel.
3. Remove the cotter pin q and loosen the rear wheel
hub castle nut w. Remove the nut, and cone washer
e from the rear wheel hub assembly.
4. Remove the lower radius rod mounting bolt r, nut 8. Remove the bearing carrier from the rear drive shaft
and washer from the bearing carrier. Swing radius and trailing arm.
rod down. Discard the nut.
8
CAUTION
Do not hang the caliper by the brake line. Use wire to
hang caliper to prevent damage to the brake line.
NOTE
Use new fastener nuts upon installation of the rear
trailing arm and bearing carrier.
TORQUE
Trailing Arm to Main Frame:
(Trailing arm spherical bearing bolt)
70 ft-lb (95 Nm)
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
TORQUE
Rear Stabilizer Bar Linkage:
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
5. Remove the four fasteners w retaining the stabilizer Stabilizer Bar Mounting Bracket Bolts:
bar to the vehicle frame. 20 ft-lb (27 Nm)
Wheel Lug Nuts:
6. Remove the bushing brackets and bushings for ease
of removal. 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
SHOCKS / SPRINGS
SHOCK ASSEMBLY VIEW SHOCK REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
Front: 1. Elevate the vehicle off the ground to relieve the
suspension load.
2. Support under A-arm or trailing arm.
3. Remove the upper and lower fasteners retaining the
shock and remove the shock from the vehicle.
Discard nuts and replace with new upon installation.
4. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the shock. Torque
new fasteners to specification.
TORQUE
Shock Mounting Bolts:
Front:
40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Rear:
70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
q 40 ft-lb (54 Nm) e 14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
w 70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
SHOCK / SPRING REPLACEMENT
Retainer gap should be 180° from spring end
1. Remove the shock and note the spring preload
distance (see Chapter 2 – Spring Adjustment
Rear: (WALKER EVANS™), page ).
2. Loosen the jam nut (if applicable) and adjustment
ring until the spring is loose. If needed, use a spring
compressor to compress the spring far enough to
remove the spring retainer.
3. Remove the spring and spring retainer from the
existing shock and install components onto the new
shock.
4. Install the spring(s) and spring retainer.
NOTE
The spring retainer gap should be 180° from the end of
the spring upon installation.
SHOCK SERVICE
WALKER EVANS SHOCK SERVICE
8
REF DESCRIPTION REF DESCRIPTION REF DESCRIPTION
1. Body Cap Asm. 14. Piston Asm, Floating (IFP) 27. Shaft Spacer (1.235" x 1.985")
2. Seal Head Asm. 15. Reservoir End Cap 28. O-Ring
3. Internal Bump Stop 16. Reservoir Body 29. Screw (8/32")
Washer (1.50" x 0.125" x
4. Shaft Bushing (0.625") 17. 30. O-Ring
0.348")
5. O-Ring 18. Crimp Nut (7/16") 31. O-Ring
6. Seal 19. Snap Ring 32. Detent Spring
7. Wiper 20. Spherical Bearing 33. Detent Ball
8. O-Ring 21. Schraeder Valve 34. Shock Body
9. Piston, Clicker 22. Snap Ring 35. Spring Adjustment Nut
10. Clicker Bolt 23. Piston Wear Band (1.750" OD) 36. Shaft, Chrome
11. Clicker Knob 24. Bump Stop 37. 2-Piece Piston Asm.
12. Clicker Stud 25. N/A
13. Screw (10/32") 26. Shaft Loop
NOTE
If leakage from a remote shock reservoir hose fitting is
evident, check for a loose fitting and seal threads with
Three Bond 1215 (PN 2871557)
RZR XP 1000 / LE Front Shock Valving RZR XP / XP4 1000 High Lifter Front Shock
Valving
CLICKER
COMPRESSION REBOUND
ASSEMBLY CLICKER
COMPRESSION REBOUND
0.900 x 0.008 0.900 x 0.015 0.700 x 0.010 ASSEMBLY
0.900 x 0.008 1.450 x 0.015 1.000 x 0.025 1.550 x 0.008 1.200 x 0.012 1.10 x 0.012
1.450 x 0.015 1.450 x 0.008 1.000 x 0.025 1.550 x 0.008 1.100 x 0.012 0.700 x 0.006
1.300 x 0.015 1.450 x 0.008 0.625 x 0.065 1.550 x 0.008 1.000 x 0.012 1.00 x 0.025
1.200 x 0.015 1.300 x 0.010 1.550 x 0.008 0.900 x 0.012 0.625 x 0.065
WARNING
Walker Evans™ shocks contain high pressure nitrogen
gas. Extreme caution must be used while handling and
working with Walker Evans™ shocks and related high
pressure service equipment. The pressure must be
released from the shock before disassembly. It is
strongly recommended you wear safety glasses and
ear protection during these procedures.
SPECIAL TOOLS
PART
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
2200421 Gas Shock Recharging Kit
PS-45908 IFP Tool
PU-50979 Shock Body Holding Tool - Front
NOTE
The rebound and compression valve stacks will always
be positioned as shown in the illustration, regardless of
how the shock assembly is installed.
NOTE
To prevent damage or marks to the shock, the use of
special tools and a soft jaw vise is recommended.
WARNING
Walker Evans™ shocks contain high pressure nitrogen
gas. Extreme caution must be used while handling and
working with Walker Evans™ shocks and related high
pressure service equipment. The pressure must be
released from the shock before disassembly. It is
strongly recommended you wear safety glasses and
ear protection during these procedures.
8. Using a 1" open-end wrench or adjustable wrench, 10. Remove and properly dispose of the oil from the
loosen and remove the bearing cap from the shock shock body.
body.
14. Using an 11/16" socket, remove the nut retaining the 19. Front Shocks Only: Using a 9/16" socket w/
valve stack and piston. extension, remove the fastener retaining the clicker
valve stack. Place the valve stack on a clean shop
towel in order of removal.
NOTE
Keep the rebound and compression valve stacks in the NOTE
order they were removed. If unsure of order, refer to
“Shock Valving” under the “Shock Service Information” Keep the valve stack in the order it was removed. If
provided earlier in this section. unsure of order, refer to “Shock Valving” under the
“Shock Service Information” provided earlier in this
section.
WALKER EVANS™ SHOCK ASSEMBLY 8. Place a new lock nut onto the shock rod. Torque the
new lock nut to specification.
1. Install new seals and O-rings on the seal head
assembly. NOTE
2. Use the appropriate shock rod holding tool and a Do not over torque the nut or damage to the valve stack
vise to mount the shock rod vertically with the can occur.
threaded end upward.
Front Shock Rod Holding Tool: 2872429 TORQUE
Rear Shock Rod Holding Tool: PU-50931
Lock Nut:
14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
NOTE
If the shock rod or the mounting eyelet end is being NOTE
replaced, apply red Loctite to the threads of the shock
shaft prior to installation. Not using Loctite may allow Make sure “Top-Out” washers are orientated as shown.
the shaft to loosen from the eyelet.
NOTE
If unsure of the valve stack order, refer to “Shock
Valving” under the “Shock Service Information”
provided earlier in this section.
10. Turn the compression adjuster knob counter- 13. Using a 3/32" Allen wrench, remove IFP bleed screw.
clockwise (soft) until it stops, so damping is in the full
open position.
14. Apply a thin film of oil to IFP O-ring and wear band.
Insert IFP into reservoir until completely submerged.
11. Use the appropriate shock body holding tool to Allow air to escape as you install the piston.
properly secure the shock assembly into a vice for
service.
Front Shock Body Holding Tool: PU-50979
Rear Shock Body Holding Tool: PU-50938
12. Fill the shock body and remote reservoir 1/2 full of
the recommended gas shock oil.
FLUID CAPACITY
Recommended Shock Oil:
Racing Gas Shock Oil (PN 2874124) (Quart)
10 Weight for Walker Evans Shocks
16. Slowly cycle the IFP up and down. 20. Add oil to the body tube until the surface of the oil is
• Be sure to bottom out piston in the reservoir body. at the top of the shock body threads.
• Allow time for the bubbles to dissipate.
• Repeat the process until all air has been removed.
17. Pull IFP up until its top is approximately 1" (2.54 cm)
from top of reservoir and remove the IFP Tool. Using
a 3/32" Allen wrench, install the IFP bleed screw.
NOTE
During installation, some shock oil will over flow. Wrap
a shop cloth around the shock body to catch any oil
overflow.
NOTE 21. Pull the damping piston up until it is just below the
surface of the oil.
When the IFP Tool is removed, the IFP must remain
submerged in shock oil to prevent air from getting under 22. Hold the rod eyelet with one hand. With other hand,
the floating piston. slide the bearing cap down the shaft until contact
with the body is made. Oil will overflow from around
the bearing cap.
18. Fill the shock body with oil approximately 1/4" below
the threads. 23. Screw the bearing cap assembly into the shock body
by hand, holding the rod up so that the bearing cap is
19. Apply a thin film of oil to the wear band on the
damping piston. Slowly insert the shock rod
in contact with the bottom of the damping piston 8
assembly. Be careful not to cross-thread the bearing
assembly into the body until the damping piston
assembly.
assembly is approximately 1" below the oil surface.
• Move rod up and down slowly over a range of about 1" 24. Using a 1" open-end wrench, tighten the bearing
until no air bubbles rise from damping piston. Be cap.
careful to keep damping piston at least 1/4" below the 25. Using a 3/32" Allen wrench, remove the IFP bleed
surface of the oil during this process. screw.
• While holding the shock rod, apply 2 - 3 sharp blows to
the rod eyelet with a rubber mallet driving the piston
down into the shock body. This opens the valves on
the damping piston. You will see the released air
bubbles come to the surface of the oil.
26. Set the IFP depth to the specified length from the top 33. Pressurize the shock reservoir through the
of the reservoir. Schrader® valve using the Gas Shock Recharging Kit
(PN 2200421).
34. Continue filling until the shaft has fully extended and
the reservoir pressure is at 125 psi.
MEASUREMENT
IFP Depth:
FRONT : 3.375″ (85.7 mm)
REAR RZR XP 1000: 6.25″ (158.8 mm)
REAR RZR XP 4 1000: 7.25″ (184.2 mm)
27. Using a long 3/32” Allen wrench, install the IFP bleed
screw.
NOTE
Apply grease to the end of the Allen wrench so the
bleed screw sticks to it during installation.
28. Pour the residual shock oil out of the reservoir into a
proper disposal container. Nitrogen Pressure (Front and Rear):
29. Install the reservoir cap. Push down on the reservoir 125 psi (862 kPa) +/- 5%
cap using even pressure until the retaining ring
groove is exposed.
WARNING
30. Install the retaining ring and check to make sure
retaining ring is seated properly. CHARGE THE SHOCK USING NITROGEN GAS
ONLY. DO NOT FILL WITH ANY OTHER GASES.
31. Push the shock rod assembly completely into the Doing so compromises the performance of the shock
shock body. It should go all the way down smoothly and may be EXTREMELY DANGEROUS!
without interference. If it does not, disassemble and
reassemble per this procedure.
35. Reinstall the valve cap.
32. Secure the shock body in a vise by its lower mount.
36. Clean all oil residue from the shock and reservoir
with solvent, and dry with low pressure compressed
air in a well ventilated area.
NOTE
If leakage from a remote shock reservoir hose fitting is
evident, check for a loose fitting and seal threads with
Three Bond 1215 (PN 2871557)
NOTE
After installation, be sure to RIDE SLOWLY initially to
ensure the shock and the vehicle’s suspension is
performing correctly.
NOTES
CHAPTER 9
BRAKE SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
BRAKE NOISE TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
BRAKE SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
BRAKE SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
BRAKE LINE ROUTING / RETENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
FRONT BRAKE LINES TO MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
REAR BRAKE LINE - MASTER CYLINDER TO JUNCTION BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
REAR BRAKE LINES - JUNCTION BLOCK TO CALIPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
MASTER CYLINDER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
BRAKE BLEEDING / FLUID CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
BRAKE PEDAL LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.13
BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.13
BRAKE PEDAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.13
FRONT BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.14
PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.14
PAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.14
PAD ASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.15
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.15
FRONT CALIPER ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.16
CALIPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.17
9
CALIPER DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.18
CALIPER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.19
CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.19
CALIPER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.20
DISC RUNOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.21
DISC INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.21
DISC REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.22
REAR BRAKES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.23
PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.23
PAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.24
PAD ASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.25
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.25
REAR CALIPER ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.26
CALIPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.27
CALIPER DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.28
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION
2870975 Mity Vac™ Pressure Test Tool
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT BRAKE SYSTEM
Item Standard Service Limit
Front Brake Pad Thickness .297 ± .007" (7.54 ± .178 mm) .180" (4.6 mm)
Front Brake Disc Thickness .188" (4.78 mm) .170" (4.32 mm)
Front Brake Disc Runout - .010" (.254 mm)
Loose wheel hub or bearings Check wheel and hub for abnormal movement.
Brake disc warped or excessively worn Replace disc
Brake disc misaligned or loose Inspect and repair as necessary
If noise does not change when brake is applied check
Noise is from other source (axle, hub, disc or wheel)
other sources. Inspect and repair as necessary
WARNING
Once a bottle is opened, use what is necessary and discard the rest in accordance with local laws. Do not store or
use a partial bottle of brake fluid. Brake fluid is hygroscopic, meaning it rapidly absorbs moisture. This causes the
boiling temperature of the brake fluid to drop, which can lead to early brake fade and the possibility of serious injury.
s Brake Switch
NOTE
Brake lines route inside the stabilizer bar and shock mounts as shown.
MASTER CYLINDER
MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL 3. Place a container to catch brake fluid under the
1. Locate the master cylinder q above the left front tire master cylinder brake line banjo bolts r.
in the wheel well area.
CAUTION
Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces. Do not allow
brake fluid to come in contact with finished surfaces.
NOTE
Make note of front and rear brake line locations to
master cylinder.
2. Remove the clip w from the clevis pin e that 5. Remove the two mounting fasteners t that secure
attaches the master cylinder to the brake pedal lever. the master cylinder to the frame.
IMPORTANT
Lubricate seals with a thin film of DOT 4 brake fluid
prior to installation.
2. Install new stat-o-seal, front left brake line banjo 4. Install the master cylinder shield and master cylinder
fitting e, new stat-o-seal, front right brake line banjo retaining bolts and nuts. Torque bolts to specification.
fitting w, new stat-o-seal, and brake pressure switch
to the front port on the master cylinder.
NOTE
Hardened washer goes under the head of the bolt not
IMPORTANT the nut. Tighten bolt from head side.
Lubricate seals with a thin film of DOT 4 brake fluid
prior to installation.
TORQUE
3. Rotate the brake lines until they are orientated as Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts:
shown. Torque banjo bolt and brake pressure switch 23 ft-lbs (31 Nm)
to specification.
5. Reconnect the main harness to the brake pressure
switch.
6. Align the operating rod clevis to the brake pedal.
Install the operating rod pin and clip to retain the
operating rod to the pedal.
e Front Left Brake Line 30° 7. Perform the BRAKE BLEEDING / FLUID CHANGE,
page 9.11 procedure.
TORQUE
Banjo Bolt / Brake Pressure Switch:
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
BRAKE BLEEDING / FLUID CHANGE 3. Add brake fluid to the indicated MAX level of
reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Bleed the right rear caliper first, followed by the left rear,
front right, and finally the front left caliper.
CAUTION
Always wear safety glasses when handling chemicals
and fluids.
CAUTION
Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces. Do not allow
brake fluid to come in contact with finished surfaces.
NOTE
Do not release foot pedal before bleeder screw is tight
or air may be drawn into master cylinder.
IMPORTANT
Do not allow the brake fluid level in the reservoir to drop
below the MIN line to prevent air from entering the
master cylinder.
TORQUE
Bleeder Screw:
48 in-lb (5 Nm)
FRONT BRAKES
PAD REMOVAL 6. Push the mounting bracket inward and slip the outer
1. Elevate and support front of vehicle. brake pad out between the bracket and caliper body.
CAUTION
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip
or fall. Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls.
PAD INSPECTION
1. Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace
pads if worn beyond the service limit.
MEASUREMENT
Front Brake Pad Thickness:
.297 ± .007" (7.5 ± .178 mm)
Service Limit: 0.180" (4.6 mm)
NOTE
Brake fluid will be forced through compensating port
into master cylinder fluid reservoir when piston is
pushed back into caliper. Remove excess fluid from
reservoir as required.
PAD ASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION 5. Install the adjustment set screw and turn clockwise
1. Lubricate mounting bracket pins q with a light film of until stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2
silicone grease and install rubber dust boots. turn (counterclockwise).
2. Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust 6. Verify fluid level in reservoir is up to MAX line inside
boots are fully seated. Install pads with friction reservoir and install reservoir cap.
material facing each other. Master Cylinder Fluid
Up to MAX line inside reservoir
WARNING
If brake pads are contaminated with grease, oil, or 7. Install wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification.
liquid soaked do not use the pads. Use only new, clean
pads. TORQUE
Wheel Nuts:
3. Install caliper onto front hub and torque mounting 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
bolts w to specification.
TORQUE
Front Caliper Mount Bolt:
30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
WARNING
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip
or fall. Severe injury may occur.
CALIPER DISASSEMBLY 5. Once the pistons are removed, use a pick to carefully
1. Remove both brake pads from the caliper (see remove the square O-rings e from the caliper. O-
Chapter 9 – “FRONT BRAKE PADS - Pad Removal, rings should be replaced during caliper service.
page 9.14”).
2. Remove mount bracket assembly q and dust boots
w.
NOTE
Be sure to clean seal grooves in caliper body.
NOTE
Do not remove the caliper pistons with a standard
pliers. The piston sealing surfaces will become
damaged if a standard pliers is used.
9
4. Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the
dust seal boots are fully seated. Install the brake
pads. Clean the disc and pads with brake parts
cleaner or denatured alcohol to remove any dirt, oil
or grease.
MEASUREMENT
Front Caliper Piston O.D.:
Std: 1.370” (34.80 mm)
Service Limit: 1.368” (34.75 mm)
CALIPER INSTALLATION 4. Install the adjustment set screw and turn clockwise
1. Install the brake line onto the caliper taking care not until stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2
to allow any debris to enter the caliper. turn (counterclockwise).
NOTE
If disc scraper q was removed, reinstall it upon caliper
installation.
TORQUE
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
TORQUE 7. Field test unit for proper braking action before putting
Front Caliper Mount Bolt w: into service. Inspect for fluid leaks and firm brakes.
30 ft-lb (41 Nm) Make sure the brake is not dragging when pedal is
released. If the brake drags, re-check assembly and
installation.
3. Torque the banjo bolt e to specification.
NOTE
If new pads are installed, refer to Brake Burnishing
Procedure, page 9.15.
TORQUE
Banjo Bolt
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
MEASUREMENT
Brake Disc Thickness:
New: .0188″ (4.78 mm)
Service Limit: 0.170″ (4.32 mm)
DISC REPLACEMENT 6. Install wheel hub assembly, washers, and castle nut.
1. Remove the front brake caliper (see Chapter 9 – Torque castle nut to specification and install a new
Caliper Removal , page 9.17). cotter pin.
TORQUE
Front Brake Caliper Mounting Bolts:
30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
TORQUE
Brake Disc Mounting Bolts t:
30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
CAUTION
Always use new brake disc mounting bolts. The bolts
have a pre-applied locking agent which is destroyed
upon removal.
REAR BRAKES
PAD REMOVAL 5. Remove the two caliper mounting bolts w and lift
1. Elevate and support rear of vehicle. caliper off the brake disc.
WARNING
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip
or fall. Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls.
NOTE
When removing caliper, be careful not to damage brake
line. Support caliper to avoid kinking or bending brake
line.
NOTE
Brake fluid will be forced through compensating port
into master cylinder fluid reservoir when piston is
pushed back into caliper. Remove excess fluid from
reservoir as required.
7. Push caliper mounting bracket inward and slip outer PAD INSPECTION
brake pad past the edge to remove. 1. Clean the caliper with brake cleaner or alcohol.
2. Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace
pads if worn beyond the service limit.
MEASUREMENT
Rear Brake Pad Thickness:
.298 ± .007″ (7.57 mm ± .178 mm)
Service Limit: .180″ (4.6 mm)
PAD ASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION 4. Install lower radius rod bolt r, washer and new nut.
1. Lubricate mounting bracket pins q with a light film of Torque to specification.
silicone grease and install rubber dust boots w.
TORQUE
2. Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust
boots are fully seated. Install pads with friction Radius Rod to Bearing Carrier Bolt:
material facing each other. M10: 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
M12 (outer): 50 ft-lb + 90° (68 Nm + 90°)
WARNING
5. Slowly pump the brake pedal until pressure has been
If brake pads are contaminated with grease, oil, or
built up. Maintain brake fluid in the reservoir between
liquid soaked do not use the pads. Use only new clean
MIN and MAX to prevent air from entering the brake
pads.
system.
3. Install the caliper and torque the new mounting bolts 6. Install the adjustment set screw and turn clockwise
until the stationary pad contacts the disc, then back
e to specification. off 1/2 turn.
7. Verify fluid level in reservoir is up to the MAX line
inside reservoir and install reservoir cap.
Master Cylinder Fluid
Up to MAX line inside reservoir
CAUTION
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip
or fall. Severe injury may occur.
MEASUREMENT
Rear Caliper Piston O.D.:
Standard: 1.500″ (38.10 mm)
Service Limit: 1.498″ (38.05 mm)
TORQUE
Banjo Bolts:
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
9
4. Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the
dust seals are fully seated. Install the brake pads.
Clean the disc and pads with brake parts cleaner or
denatured alcohol to remove any dirt, oil or grease.
3. Install lower radius rod bolt, washer and new nut. DISC INSPECTION
Torque to specification. 1. Visually inspect disc for scoring, scratches, or
gouges. Replace disc if deep scratches are evident.
2. Use a 0-1″ micrometer and measure disc thickness
at eight different points around the pad contact
surface. Replace disc if worn beyond service limit.
TORQUE
Radius Rod to Bearing Carrier Bolt:
M10: 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
M12 (outer): 50 ft-lb + 90° (68 Nm + 90°)
6. Install wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification. Brake Disc Thickness Variance:
Service Limit: 0.002″ (0.051 mm)
TORQUE
Wheel Nuts: 3. Mount a dial indicator and measure disc runout.
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm) Slowly rotate the disc and read total runout on the
dial indicator. Replace the disc if runout exceeds
specifications.
NOTE
If new pads are installed, refer to Brake Burnishing MEASUREMENT
Procedure, page 9.25. Brake Disc Runout:
Service Limit: .010″ (0.254 mm)
DISC REPLACEMENT 6. Install wheel hub assembly, washers, and castle nut.
1. Remove rear brake caliper (see Chapter 9 – Caliper Torque castle nut to specification and install a new
Removal, page 9.27). cotter pin.
CAUTION
Always use new brake disc mounting bolts. The bolts
have a pre-applied locking agent which is destroyed
upon removal.
TORQUE
Brake Disc Mounting Bolts:
30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
TROUBLESHOOTING
POOR BRAKE PERFORMANCE
• Air in system
• Water in system (brake fluid contaminated)
• Caliper or disc misaligned
• Caliper dirty or damaged
• Brake line damaged or lining ruptured
• Worn disc and/or friction pads
• Incorrectly adjusted stationary pad
• Worn or damaged master cylinder or components
• Damaged break pad noise insulator
• Brake pads dragging
• Brake caliper dragging
PEDAL VIBRATION
• Disc damaged
• Disc worn (runout or thickness variance exceeds
service limit)
BRAKES LOCK
• Alignment of caliper to disc
• Caliper pistons sticking
• Improper assembly of brake system components
CHAPTER 10
BODY / FRAME
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2
DECAL REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2
BODY ASSEMBLY VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3
CAB FRAME ASSEMBLY XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3
CAB FRAME ASSEMBLY XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4
DOORS XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6
DOORS (XP4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7
DOORS HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.8
DASH INSTRUMENTS / CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.9
DASH INSTRUMENTS / CONTROLS HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
HOOD / FRONT BODY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
CHASSIS / MAIN FRAME XP / HIGH LIFTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
CHASSIS / MAIN FRAME XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
SEAT ASSEMBLY FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
SEAT ASSEMBLY REAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
FLOOR / ROCKER PANELS XP / HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
FLOOR / ROCKER PANELS XP 4 / XP 4 HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
REAR CARGO BOX / FENDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18
REAR BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
BODY COMPONENT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
ENGINE SERVICE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
FRONT BUMPER XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
REAR BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
HOOD AND FRONT BODY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
REAR FENDER / FENDER FLAIR REMOVAL XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.22
REAR FENDER FLARE / REAR FENDER REMOVAL XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.23
CARGO BOX ASSEMBLY REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.23 10
ROCKER PANELS, CONSOLE AND FLOOR XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
ROCKER PANELS, REAR CONSOLE AND FLOOR XP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.25
DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.28
DOOR PANEL / LATCH REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.28
DOOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.28
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS DECAL REPLACEMENT
PART
TOOL DESCRIPTION WARNING
NUMBER
2200421 Gas Shock Recharging Kit The following procedure involves the use of an open
flame. Perform this procedure in a well ventilated area,
Shock Spring Preload Spanner away from gasoline or other flammable materials. Be
2878925 Wrench (Walker Evans™) sure the area to be flame treated is clean and free of
2876389 Multi-Function Pliers gasoline or flammable residue.
Spanner Wrench - 2.5″ / 3.0″ Inner
PU-51829 Internal Bypass (FOX)
CAUTION
Spanner Wrench - 2.5″ Outer Internal
PU-51830 Bypass (FOX) Do not flame treat components that are installed on the
vehicle. Remove the component from the vehicle
Spanner Wrench - 3.0″ Outer Internal before flame treating.
PU-51832 Bypass (FOX)
PU-51837 Shock Body Holding Tool (2.5″) (FOX) The body cab components are plastic polyethylene
PU-51838 Shock Body Bolding Tool (3.0″) (FOX) material. Therefore, they must be “flame treated” prior to
installing a decal to ensure good adhesion. The flame
Walker Evans™: See Walker Evans™ Shock Service treating procedure can also be used to reduce or
later in this chapter, page 8.29 eliminate the whitish stress marks that are sometimes left
after a fender or cab is bent, flexed, or damaged.
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions: 1-800-345-2233
or http://polaris.service-solutions.com CAUTION
Do not flame treat painted plastic components. Painted
plastic surfaces should only be wiped clean prior to
decal adhesion.
1. Install hip bolster and secure the bottom mount with M8 x 1.24 x 20 bolts. Torque bolts to 14 ft-lb (19 Nm).
2. Install ROPS to hip bolster and frame with M10 x 1.25 x 55 bolts and nuts. Tighten fasteners to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
3. Install the front ROPS to the frame with M10 x 1.5 x 45 screws and nuts. Install front ROPS to ROPS hoop with
M10 x 1.5 x 20 screws. Torque fasteners to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm).
4. Install rear ROPS to the ROPS hoop with M10 x 1.5 x 25 screws. Install rear ROPS to frame with M10 x 1.5 x 45
screws and nuts. Torque fasteners to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm).
5. Install visor on front ROPS with M10 x 1.25 x 20 bolts. Torque bolts to 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
10
q Cab Frame Fasteners 40 ft-lb (54 Nm) r Visor Screws 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
w Cab Frame Extenders t Front ROPS Bracket 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
e Hip Bolster Lower Fasteners 14 ft-lb (19 Nm) y Hip Bolster
1. Install the ROPS mid-hoop to the frame with M10 x 1.5 x 65 screws and nuts o. Torque to 17 ft-lb (23 Nm).
2. Install hip bolsters onto the main frame with M8 x 1.25 x 20 bolts a. Torque bolts to 14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
3. Install ROPS rear hoop to frame with M10 x 1.25 x 55 bolts and nuts i. Torque to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
4. Attach ROPS main to the mid ROPS hoop and front main frame with M10 x 1.5 x 45 screws i. Torque to 40 ft-lb
(54 Nm).
5. Install rear ROPS to rear ROPS hoop and rear frame with M10 x 1.5 x 45 screws i. Torque to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
6. Install ROPS brace to ROPS mid hoop and ROPS rear hoop with M10 x 1.5 x 45 screws i. Torque to 40 ft-lb (54
Nm)
7. Install ROPS front to ROPS mains with M10 x 1.5 x 20 screws i. Torque to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
8. Install visor panel on front ROPS with M10 x 1.25 x 20 bolts s. Torque to 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
10
DOORS XP
DOORS (XP4)
10
10
10
w Screw
4 ft-lb (5 Nm) y Seat Back
10
o Body Screws
q Rear Fascia 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
w Rear Fascia Screws
8 ft-lb (11 Nm) a Rear Fender
s Cargo Box Screws
e Intake Cover 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
r Intake Pre-filter d Cargo Box Panel
t Shock Panel Screw
14 in-lbs (2 Nm) f Intake Cover Retainer
y Shock Panel g Rear Fascia Support Brackets
u Passenger Side Cargo Box Half h Bracket Fasteners
8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
i Fender Flair j Driver Side Cargo Box Half
REAR BUMPER
10
8. Remove the dash assembly from the vehicle. REAR FENDER / FENDER FLAIR REMOVAL
XP
NOTE
The lower dash is also held by clips. Pull the dash Fender Flair Removal:
straight out to disengage the clips.. 1. Remove the three Torx screws q.
NOTE
Two of the screws will be longer than the others. Note
this for reassembly.
REAR FENDER FLARE / REAR FENDER 5. Remove fender from the vehicle.
REMOVAL XP 4
CARGO BOX ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
1. Remove the three plastic rivets on the lower fender
flare q. Remove the four T40 Torx screws w. 1. Remove both seats.
2. Remove the PVT pre-filter (driver side) and air intake
pre-filter (passenger side) assembly.
3. Remove the T-25 Torx screw retaining each shock
reservoir hose cover and remove the cover..
4. Loosen the shock reservoir clamps and maneuver
the reservoir through the hole in the box.
NOTE
Do NOT let the reservoir hang by the hose. Use a wire
or string to restrain the reservoir.
10
8. Remove the 17 Torx screws in the bed of the cargo 4. Remove shift handle knob and remove the console.
box.
ROCKER PANELS, REAR CONSOLE AND 5. Remove three Torx T40 fasteners t from top of
FLOOR XP 4 fender flare. Remove two torx T40 fasteners y & u.
Note length and location of fasteners. Remove fender
Rocker Panel Removal flare.
1. Remove rear fender flare. (See Chapter 10 – Rear
Fender Flare / Rear Fender Removal XP 4, page
10.23).
2. Remove rear fender. (See Chapter 10 – Rear Fender
Flare / Rear Fender Removal XP 4, page 10.23).
3. Remove the four Torx T40 rear door mounting
fasteners q and remove door.
2. Remove four Torx T40 screws q and five push rivets 7. Remove the seat frame.
w retaining the front console to the floor. 8. Disconnect negative and positive battery cables.
Remove the battery.
9. Remove two fasteners retaining the fuse panel to the
lower rear close off panel.
10. Remove two fasteners retaining the voltage regulator
to the back of the lower rear close off panel.
11. Remove two Torx T40 screws u and four push rivets
i retaining the lower rear close off panel.
12. Remove four Torx T40 screws o and four push rivets
a retaining the upper rear close off panel. Remove
the upper close off panel.
13. Disconnect the shift cable s from the front seat base.
Remove two M8x1.25x20 bolts d and two
M10x1.25x55 bolts f from the front seat base.
Remove front seat base assembly.
10
TORQUE
Door Latch Fasteners:
8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
4. Adjust the door until the front latch is centered both TORQUE
vertically and horizontally in the striker bracket, as
shown. Door Panel Fasteners:
22 in-lb (2 Nm)
NOTE
If it is difficult to center vertically and horizontally, loosen
striker assembly fasteners w for extra adjustment.
Torque striker fasteners once aligned.
TORQUE
Striker Fasteners:
8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
10
TORQUE
Door Hinge Fasteners:
8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
NOTES
CHAPTER 11
ELECTRICAL
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
UNDER-DASH COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
ELECTRICAL SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
ELECTRICAL SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
DIGITAL MULTI-METER (DMM) NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
STATIC AND DYNAMIC TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
STATIC TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
DYNAMIC TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
CONNECTOR PROBING GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
FRONT PROBING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
BACK PROBING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
BREAK OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
TESTING CONTINUITY/RESISTANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8
TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8
TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9
TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9
TESTING CURRENT FLOW (AMPERAGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10
TESTING PARASITIC DRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.11
TESTING VOLTAGE DROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.11
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
INFORMATION DISPLAY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14
DIAGNOSTIC MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PINOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18
RIDE COMMAND SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19
RIDE COMMAND DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19
TOUCHSCREEN BUTTONS / ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.20
GAUGE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.20
AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.21 11
MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.21
DEVICE MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.24
APPS SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.27
GENERAL SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28
AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28
VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.29
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS UNDER-DASH COMPONENTS
The following switches and components can be
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION accessed underneath the instrument / dash panel:
PV-43568 Fluke™ 77 Digital Multimeter • Speedometer
• AWD Switch
PV-43526 Connector Test Kit
• Headlamp Switch
2870630 Timing Light • 12 Vdc Accessory Power Point
• Ignition Switch
PU-50338 Battery Hydrometer • LED Ambiance Light
2460761 Hall Effect Sensor Probe Harness
2871745 Static Timing Light Harness
Battery Conductance Analyzer
PU-50296 (MDX-610P)
11
ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
ELECTRICAL SERVICE NOTES STATIC AND DYNAMIC TESTING
Keep the following notes in mind when diagnosing an There are many methods for testing a DC circuit. These
electrical problem. methods fall into one of two categories, either static or
dynamic.
• Refer to wiring diagram for stator and electrical
component resistance specifications. STATIC TESTING
• When measuring resistance of a component that has a The two most common forms of static testing are:
low resistance value (under 10 Ohms), remember to
subtract meter lead resistance from the reading. • Resistance testing (the Ohms setting on your DMM)
Connect leads together and record the resistance. The • Measuring voltage with the circuit open, such as when
resistance of the component is equal to tested value the harness connector is off a sensor you are testing.
minus the lead resistance. This is commonly referred to as measuring “Available
• Become familiar with the operation of your meter. Be Voltage”.
sure leads are in the proper jack for the test being
performed (i.e. 10A jack for current readings). Refer to These two tests will help you find the majority of electrical
the Owner’s Manual included with your meter. issues. If they do not, we must remember that static
• Voltage, amperage, and resistance values included in circuit testing does not take into account how current
this manual are obtained with a Fluke™ 77 Digital actually flows in that circuit. That is only accomplished
Multimeter (PV-43568). This meter is acceptable for with dynamic testing.
use when diagnosing electrical problems. Readings Before attempting dynamic testing (as it is intrusive on
obtained with other meters may differ. sealed connectors and damage could be done if not
• Pay attention to the prefix on the meter reading (K, M, careful), verify the following:
etc.) and the position of the decimal point. • Static voltage testing advised for that circuit has been
• For resistance readings, isolate component to be completed, and is in spec.
tested. Disconnect wire harness or power supply. • All associated circuits have under 1 ohm of resistance
from end to end. Testing Continuity/Resistance, page
11.8
DIGITAL MULTI-METER (DMM) NOTES • All associated circuits have no shorts to ground.
Polaris advises to only use a high quality DMM that Testing For A Short To Ground, page 11.8
meets the same standards as the Fluke™ 77 (PV-43568) • All associated circuits have no shorts to voltage.
for electrical testing. Testing For A Short To Voltage, page 11.9
Unless you are very familiar with Ohm’s Law, and have
complete information about the circuit you are trying to DYNAMIC TESTING
diagnose, test lights are likely to provide results that There are two types of dynamic testing we will advise to
would be misleading. This is especially true if any solid use when diagnosing electrical concerns:
state component is involved, where you will almost • Current flow testing (Amperage) Testing Current Flow
certainly not have complete circuit information. (Amperage), page 11.10. Measuring Amperage is not
Polaris also specifically advises against the use of other a common practice, as you will not typically have a
circuit testing devices, including but not limited to: spec to compare your reading to. Also, many
components on this machine flow over 10 Amps, which
• Short finders
will blow the majority of DMM fuses. The exception to
• Simplified circuit testers
this is a parasitic draw test. Testing Parasitic Draw,
• Fuse piggy-back devices
page 11.11
Testers beside a DMM will only work in one scenario, • Measuring voltage drop. Performing this test correctly
and slight variables can provide you with misleading will give you understanding of how electrical pressure
results. The testing practices described in this chapter (voltage) varies in a circuit as current is flowing.
are more certain and rely only on the DMM and your Testing Voltage Drop, page 11.11
knowledge.
WARNING
Always exercise caution when using these tools, and
use them for short periods of time when changing the
temp of an area. Failure to do so can lead to Serious
injury and/or damage to the machine.
11
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
OVERVIEW
The instrument cluster displays critical vehicle information to the user. Reference the following page for display
functions and descriptions.
NOTE
Some features are not applicable to all models.
The use of a high pressure washer may damage the instrument cluster. Wash the vehicle by hand or with a garden
hose using mild soap. Certain products, including insect repellents and chemicals, will damage the instrument cluster
lens. Do not use alcohol to clean the instrument cluster. Do not allow insect sprays to contact the lens. Immediately
clean off any gasoline that splashes on the instrument cluster.
The rider information display is located in the instrument cluster. All segments will light up for 1 second at start-up.
NOTE
If the instrument cluster fails to illuminate, a battery over-voltage may have occurred and the instrument cluster may
have shut off to protect the electronic speedometer.
r High Beam Indicator - LED icon illuminates whenever the Headlamp switch is in the high beam position.
Fuel Level Indicator - LCD bar graph indicating current fuel level. All segments will flash when the fuel
t level is very low.
a AWD Indicator - Illuminated when the AWD / 2WD switch is in the AWD position.
Differential Unlocked Indicator - If equipped with Turf Mode, will illuminate when the AWD switch is in
s Turf mode..
d Neutral Gear Indicator - LED icon illuminates when gear selector is in the neutral (N) position.
Gear Position Indicator - Displays gear selector position.
P = Park
R = Reverse
f N = Neutral
H = High Forward Gear
L = Low Forward Gear
– = Gear Signal Error (shifter stuck between gears)
Power Steering System MIL - LED icon illuminates when a fault has occurred in the EPS system. This
g indicator also turns on momentarily when the key is turned on.
Turn Signal / Hazard Lamp Indicator - If equipped with turn signals, the LED icon illuminates whenever
h the left, right or hazard blinker is activated.
Helmet / Seat Belt Indicator - LED icon illuminates for several seconds when the key is turned to the ON
j position as a reminder for the riders to properly use safety equipment. The lamp stays illuminated until the
driver’s seat belt is properly latched.
11
k Hours Indicator - Illuminates when Hours are being displayed on the Information Display
Tachometer (RPM)
Clock
3. When the display flashes the distance setting, tap the Under / Over Voltage
MODE button to advance to the desired setting.
This warning usually indicates that the vehicle is
operating at an RPM too low to keep the battery charged.
It may also occur when the engine is at idle and a high
electrical load is applied (lights, cooling fan or other
accessories).
If battery voltage drops below 11 volts, a warning screen
will display “Lo” and provide the present battery voltage.
If voltage drops below 8.5 volts, LCD backlighting and
icons will turn off.
Park Brake Indicator 3. A set of three numbers will appear in the information
area.
This warning is used to notify the operator that the park
brake lever is engaged (if equipped). • The first number (located far left) can range from 0 to
9. This number represents the total number of trouble
When the park brake is fully engaged, “BRAKE” appears
codes present (example: 2 means there are 3 codes
in the rider information display. Engine speed is limited to
present).
1500 RPM in all gears, except neutral. If throttle is
• The second number (located top right) can be 2 to 6
applied, this limiting feature prevents operation, which
digits in length. This number equates to the suspected
protects the park brake pads from excessive wear.
area of fault (SPN).
• The third number (located bottom right) can be 1 to 2
digits in length. This number equates to the fault mode
(FMI).
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
IMPORTANT
Most trouble codes are set as a result of damaged
wiring or a component that was not hooked up correctly.
4. Use the trouble code reference table in the EFI
The diagnostic mode is accessible only when the check Chapter for a description of each code (see Chapter
engine MIL has been activated. 4 – Diagnostic Trouble Code List, page ).
Use the following procedure to display diagnostic trouble 5. If more than one code exists, press the MODE button
codes that were activated during current ignition cycle to advance to the next trouble code.
causing the MIL to illuminate. Diagnostic trouble codes
will remain stored in the gauge (even if MIL turns off) until 6. To exit the diagnostic mode, press and hold the
the key is turned off. MODE button or turn the ignition key OFF once the
1. If the trouble code (s) are not displayed, use the codes are recorded.
MODE button to toggle until “CK ENG” displays on NOTE
the information display area.
If there is a diagnostic problem with the power steering
system, the power steering MIL will illuminate and blink
in place of the check engine MIL.
11
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PINOUTS 2. Push the instrument cluster e out from the back side
of the dash while securely holding the dash q and
rubber mount w.
FUNCTION PIN
CAN High 1
CAN Low 2
NOTE
Switched Power (Vdc) 3
Do not remove the rubber mount from the dash panel.
Constant Power (Vdc) 4 Only remove the rubber mount if necessary. The bezel
Ground 5 r is a snap-on assembly and is a serviceable part.
High Beam Input 8
International Models Only INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTALLATION
1. Spray a soap and water mixture onto the outer
Turn Signal Input, LH 6 surface area of the instrument cluster. This will help
Turn Signal Input, RH the instrument cluster slide into the rubber mount
7
more easily.
2. Be sure the rubber mount inside the dash is fully
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL installed and that the indexing key on the rubber
mount is lined up with the keyway in the dash.
NOTE 3. Hold the dash securely and insert the instrument
Do not allow alcohol or petroleum products to come in cluster into the dash. Twist the instrument cluster
contact with the instrument cluster lens. gently in a clockwise motion to properly seat the
instrument cluster into the rubber mount. Apply
1. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the pressure on the bezel while pressing down on the
back side of the instrument cluster. instrument cluster.
TOUCHSCREEN BUTTONS / ICONS 6. Swipe down from the top of the screen or press the
upper navigation bar to adjust brightness and
GAUGE SCREEN Bluetooth connection.
AUDIO MAP
1. Press the audio screen button shown above to 1. Press the Map Screen button shown above to display
display the audio screen. the map screen.
2. Use the source button in the top left corner to change 2. The map should center you based on the location of
between FM, AM, Weather, Bluetooth, and USB the GPS.
Audio. 3. Use the plus and minus signs on the left side of the
3. Press the tune up or down icons to change the radio screen, or pinch the screen with your fingers to zoom
station by small increments or press the scan up or in and out on the map.
down icon to search for the next quality signal station.
4. To set favorites, scroll to a radio station and hold an
“Empty” favorite icon. Press the arrows on either side
of the favorites to view all 18 favorite slots.
11
6. Select the add waypoint icon shown below to drop 9. You can also save a ride on your Display by clicking
and name a waypoint where the crosshairs are on the Record icon shown below to start recording
pointing. your ride.
2. To view a ride on your display go to the rides menu 2. Press the down arrow icon to the left of the ride or
and press the View Ride icon to toggle whether the waypoint that you would like to download. The ride/
ride is shown on your display or not. waypoint should then appear in your ride or waypoint
list on the navigation screen.
NOTE
In order for .gpx files to be imported they must be saved
in the root of a flash drive rather than in a folder
3. To edit a ride/waypoint select the ride/waypoint you
wish to edit then press the edit icon. From here you
can rename the ride or waypoint and change its color Export Rides and Waypoints
by pressing the color icon to the left of its name. 1. To export rides/waypoints from your USB drive, plug
the USB drive in to the USB pigtail/port and press the
USB export icon.
NOTE
You must be on the waypoint manager screen to import
or export waypoints. You must be on the ride manager
screen to import or export rides.
5. To delete a ride or waypoint select the ride/waypoint
you would like to delete and press the delete icon.
Polaris RIDE COMMAND™ App
Rides and waypoints can also be created and edited with
the Polaris RIDE COMMAND™ app. These rides and
waypoints can then be transferred to and from the
display via Bluetooth connection with your smartphone.
Android
1. From your smartphone settings, open the Bluetooth
1. Press the Device Manager button shown above to options on your device and ensure that Bluetooth is
display the device manager screen. turned on.
2. This will open up the display below.
NOTE
On some phones you have to make the phone visible to
other devices. If your phone has this feature, it should
show up on the Bluetooth connection screen of your
phone. If no option exists to make your phone visible to
the display, it is already visible to the display.
iPhone
1. In your iPhone settings turn on Bluetooth. If
available, make your phone discoverable to other
devices in your iPhone’s Bluetooth settings. When
your phone appears on the display press the “+”
button next to it.
2. A prompt will appear on your iPhone requesting
“Polaris RZR” to pair with your phone.
3. Ensure the conformation code on the screen and your
phone are the same then press “Pair” on your phone.
5. For optimal experience press “Accept” on your phone 6. The display will now show a list of previously
when requested to access contacts and messages. connected phones on the display. If it is unpaired,
click on your phone from the list.
11
NOTE
There is no built in microphone in the display. Phone
call audio will play through the phone speakers or
Polaris approved headset if connected. Some dial
options may be unavailable at speeds greater than 3
MPH. 2. Turn your Bluetooth headset on and put it in phone
pairing mode.
3. When your Bluetooth headset appears on the display
press the “+” icon on the display.
Hardwire Mobile Phone 4. The display will say “Pairing Headset” and give you a
Users can also hardwire their smart phones to connect to code. Press OK to pair.
the display and play music. To do this just plug a USB 5. Users can then return to the Device Management
charge cable for your smartphone into the USB pigtail/ menu and toggle whether music plays through the
port. headset or speakers with the icon below the headset
name.
NOTE
USB music playback is not available on all devices.
APPS SCREEN
11
GENERAL SETTINGS
Pressing the Settings icon will take you to a general
settings screen as shown below:
RIDE STATUS
The Ride Stats icon shows a summary of previous rides.
The Ride Stats menu can be reset using the reset icon in
the bottom right corner.
NOTE
Faults display if they were active at least once during
the current ignition cycle. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is ON, one or more of the faults in this list is
an active fault.
LOCK TOUCHSCREEN
By pressing the Lock Touchscreen icon, you will see the
display below. This screen is useful for clearing your
screen of debris. To get out of this screen, press any of
the hard buttons below the screen. 11
GOPRO
The GoPro menu lets users sync their GoPro to the
Display. From this, it allows control of camera record
functions, switching camera options, and still previews of
recorded videos and playback of previous images.
NOTE
Preview image will be disabled when traveling at
speeds over 15 MPH.
11
Check the 5amp fuse labeled INST in the main fuse box.
2 Refer to Fuse Box, page 11.59. Go to Step 9 Go to Step 3
Is the fuse blown?
Reinstall INST fuse and test screen for proper operation.
3 Did you find and repair the condition? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 4
1. Turn ignition on
2. Check for battery voltage on pin 16 (Ground), 31 (Switched Power)
4 and 32 (Battery Power) of display connector. Go to Step 8 Go to Step 5
Is there Battery Voltage at all pins?
Refer to the wiring schematic and check circuits without voltage for Go to Step 1
5 continuity and proper operation. Go to Step 7 and repeat
Did you find any problems in the circuit? diagnosis
Problem: Screen missing pixels, LCD screen flaw, software glitch or problem
3. If antenna connector has 0Vdc supplied, check harness for loose connection or breaks in wiring. Check for power
at SW PWR fuse in fuse box.
4. If antenna connector shows proper voltage, check operation of GPS. If GPS still is not functioning, proceed to step
5.
5. Turn the ignition off and make the following measurements on the antenna connector:
6.
WIRING CONNECTION TO MEASURE RESISTANCE SPECIFICATION
CAN Between Pins 1 and 2 60 Ohms
7. If resistance value is out of spec, check for breaks in yellow/green CAN wiring.
8. If all values are within specification, replace GPS antenna with new unit.
11
SWITCHES
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH HEADLAMP SWITCH
1. The brake light switch q is located on the front brake 1. Disconnect the headlamp switch harness by
line banjo bolt of the master cylinder. The brake depressing the connector locks and pulling on the
switch can be accessed through the left front wheel connector. Do not pull on the wiring.
well opening.
2. Test between the 3 sets of outputs (OFF / LOW /
HIGH). If any of the tests fail, replace headlamp
switch assembly.
• Move the switch to HIGH. There should be continuity
between switch pins 2 and 3; 5 and 6; 7 and 8.
• Move the switch to LOW. There should be continuity
between switch pins 2 and 3; 4 and 5; 7 and 8..
• Move the switch to OFF. There should be continuity
between switch pins 1 and 2; 4 and 5; 7 and 8.
NOTE
Pins 7 and 8 provide power and ground to light the
switch lamp.
11
Testing:
1. Disconnect the harness q running to the seat belt.
Testing
1. Disconnect the harness from the hazard switch. Testing
2. Test outputs in both the ON and OFF positions. If any 1. Disconnect the Turn/Lights/Horn switch by
of the tests fail, replace the switch. depressing the connector locks and pulling on the
• Move switch to ON. There should be continuity connector. Do NOT pull on the wiring.
between switch pins 2 and 3. 2. Test between the sets of outputs. If any of the tests
• Move the switch to OFF. There should be no continuity fail, replace the switch assembly.
between any switch pins. • Turn on the High Beam. There should be continuity
between switch pins 2 and 5.
• Turn on the Low Beam. There should be continuity
between switch pins 2 and 6.
• Turn on the Left Turn Signal. There should be
continuity between switch pins 1 and 8.
• Turn on the Right Turn Signal. There should be
continuity between switch pins 1 and 7.
• Depress the Horn. There should be continuity between
switch pins 3 and 4.
11
TURN LIGHTS
Front
The front turn lights are retained to the front bumper by a
single faster q, accessible through the front grill.
Rear
The rear turn lights are integrated into the rear taillight. If
the taillights are functioning properly but there is no
blinker, check the wiring connections and the flasher
module.
CAUTION
Do not power the solenoid with 12 Volts for more than 1
second, or damage may occur to solenoid.
NOTE
Verify all wires and wiring connections have been
tested properly with a known good volt/ohm meter
before suspecting a component failure. 80% of all
electrical issues are caused by bad/failed connections
and grounds.
11
IGNITION COIL
OPERATION OVERVIEW IGNITION COIL TESTS
The ignition coil q is used to provide high voltage to fire The ignition coil can be tested by using an ohm meter.
the spark plugs. When the ignition key is on, DC voltage Use the following illustration and specification table to
is present in the primary side of the ignition coil windings. test the ignition coil resistance.
During engine rotation, an AC pulse is created within the
crankshaft position sensor for each passing tooth on the TEST PIN CONNECTION Ω
flywheel’s encoder ring. The encoder ring missing tooth Between 1 & 2
Primary 0.4 Ω
creates an “interrupt” input signal, corresponding to Between 2 & 3
specific crankshaft position. This signal serves as a Secondary Between High Tension
reference for the control of ignition timing. The ECU then (PTO) Lead Caps 7.0 k Ω ± 5%
calculates the time interval between the consecutive
pulses, and determines when to trigger the voltage spike Secondary Between High Tension
(MAG) Lead Caps 7.4 k Ω ± 5%
that induces the voltage from the primary to the
secondary coil windings to fire the spark plugs.
Primary Test
TORQUE
Ignition Coil Mounting Bolt:
8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
CHARGING SYSTEM
CURRENT DRAW - KEY OFF WARNING
CAUTION Never start the engine with an ammeter connected in
series. Damage to the meter or meter fuse will result.
Do not connect or disconnect the battery cable or
ammeter with the engine running. Damage will occur to Do not run test for extended period of time.
electrical components. Do not run test with high amperage accessories.
Connect an ammeter in series with the negative battery 1. Using an inductive amperage metering device, (set
cable. Check for current draw with the key off. If the draw to DC amps) connect to the negative battery cable.
is excessive, loads should be disconnected from the 2. With engine off, key switch and lights in the on
system one by one until the draw is eliminated. Check position, the ammeter should read negative amps
component wiring as well as the component for partial (battery discharge).
shorts to ground to eliminate the draw.
3. Shift transmission into park and start the engine.
With the engine running at idle, observe meter
readings.
4. Increase engine RPM while observing ammeter and
tachometer. Note the RPM at which the battery starts
to charge (ammeter indication is positive).
5. With lights and other electrical loads off, the “break
even” point should occur at approximately 1500 RPM
or lower.
TEST 1: Resistance Value of Each Stator Leg 8. Example: The alternator current output reading
1. Measure the resistance value of each of the three should be approximately 21 VAC at 1300 RPM
stator legs: Y1 to Y2, Y1 to Y3, and Y2 to Y3. Each between each ‘leg’.
test should measure: 0.07 - 0.13 Ω
NOTE
CONNECT If one or more of the stator leg output AC voltage varies
OHMS
TEST METER significantly from the specified value, the stator may
READING
LEADS TO: need to be replaced.
Battery Charge
Y1 to Y2 0.07 - 0.13 Ω
Coil
AC VOLTAGE (VAC)
Battery Charge RPM READING
Y1 to Y3 0.07 - 0.13 Ω READING
Coil
1300 21 VAC ± 25%
Battery Charge
Y2 to Y3 0.07 - 0.13 Ω 3000 47 VAC ± 25%
Coil
5000 79 VAC ± 25%
NOTE
If there are any significant variations in ohm readings
between the three legs it is an indication that one of the STATOR (ALTERNATOR) REPLACEMENT
stator legs may be weak or failed. Refer to Chapter 3 – Stator Cover Removal / Inspection,
page 3.43 procedure to service the stator.
TEST 2: Resistance Value of Each Stator Leg to NOTE
Ground
2. Measure the resistance value of each of the stator The stator cover can be removed with the engine
legs to ground: Y1 to Ground, Y2 to Ground, Y3 to installed in the chassis.
Ground. Be sure to thoroughly clean the area around the stator
cover prior to removal.
3. Each test should measure: Open Line (OL)
CONNECT
OHMS
TEST METER
READING
LEADS TO:
Battery Charge Y1, Y2, or Y3 Open Line
Coil to Ground (Infinity)
NOTE
Any measurement other than Infinity (open) will indicate
a failed or shorted stator leg.
NOTE
If the regulator / rectifier case temperature exceeds
230° F or 110° C, the unit will turn itself off to cool down.
The unit will turn on again after it has cooled down to at
least 212° F or 100° C. If it turns off, verify the cooling
fins are clean, free from mud/debris and that adequate
airflow is present.
REGULATOR REPLACEMENT
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Push the locking tabs down on the front fascia grill
and remove the grill.
5. Install regulator onto the mounting plate. Torque
mounting fasteners to specification.
TORQUE
Regulator Mounting Fasteners:
5 ft-lb (7 Nm)
11
BATTERY
BATTERY SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL BATTERY INFORMATION
Nominal Open
Circuit Voltage 12.8 Vdc or more.
WARNING
Recommended 1.8A @ 5-10 HR or 6.0A @ 1 Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains acid!
Charging Rate HR Serious burns can result from contact with the skin,
eyes, or clothing.
NOTE ANTIDOTE:
Never attempt to open the battery. If the seal is broken, External: Flush with water.
the battery will be ruined and will fail within a few Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk. Follow
weeks. with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call
a physician immediately.
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention.
NOTE
Maintenance Free batteries should be kept at a high
state of charge during storage. If the battery is stored or
used at a low state of charge, hard crystal sulfation will
form on the plates, reducing the efficiency and service
life of the battery.
Use a volt/ohm meter to test battery voltage.
CHARGING PROCEDURE
If battery voltage is 12.6 Vdc or less, the battery may
need recharging. When using an automatic charger, refer
to the charger manufacturer’s instructions for recharging.
Do not exceed 6 amps when charging the battery.
NOTE
Charge the battery using an automatic charger that will
not exceed 14.6 Vdc. An automatic charger will signal
when charging is complete.
Allow the battery to stand disconnected for at least 1-2
hours after being properly charged. If the voltage drops
below 12.6 volts, charging was ineffective or the battery
needs to be replaced.
WARNING
An overheated battery could explode, causing severe
injury or death. Always watch charging times carefully.
Stop charging if the battery becomes very warm to the
touch. Allow it to cool before resuming charging.
Needs At least
25% - 50% 12.0 - 12.3 Charge 13 hrs
Needs At least
0% - 25% 12.0 or less Charge 20 hrs
NOTE
Follow the charger instructions supplied by the
manufacture regarding the order or connections, switch
positions and when to connect the charger to an outlet.
LIGHTING SYSTEM
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT 6. Adjust the beam to desired position. Repeat the
The headlight beams are adjustable. procedure to adjust the other headlight.
HEADLAMP REPLACEMENT
1. Disconnect wire harness from headlamp assembly
q. Be sure to pull on the connector, not on the
wiring.
11
NOTE
The front bumper can be removed and placed face
down on a suitable workbench to ease headlamp
replacement (see Chapter 10 – Front Bumper XP, page
10.20).
2. Insert the three T-25 headlamp mounting screws into DASH LIGHT
the headlamp assembly mounting holes.
The LED light will remain ON for approximately 30
3. Maneuver the headlamp assembly into position. Be seconds after key has been switched to the OFF
sure all three headlamp springs w and mounting position.
screws q are properly aligned with mounting bosses
e on the front bumper.
TAILLIGHT REPLACEMENT
Before replacing the taillight(s), use a digital multi-meter
to test the harness to ensure the lamp is receiving 12
volts and that a ground path is present.
1. Disconnect the wire harness q.
COOLING SYSTEM
FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPERATION / ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
TESTING SENSOR (ECT) OVERVIEW
Power is supplied to the fan via the Orange/Black wire Mounted in the thermostat housing, the engine
when the relay is ON. The ground path for the fan motor temperature sensor q measures coolant temperature.
is through the Brown harness wire. Refer to Relay The engine temperature sensor is a Negative
Operation, page later in this chapter for more Temperature Coefficient (NTC) type sensor, as the
information on fan functions. temperature increases the resistance decreases.
CAUTION
Keep hands away from fan blades during operation.
Serious personal injury could result.
NOTE
The fan may not function or operation may be delayed if
coolant level is low or if air is trapped in the cooling
system. Be sure cooling system is full and purged of air.
11
STARTING SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING STARTER MOTOR REMOVAL
Starter Motor Does Not Run 1. Remove driver side seat and disconnect the battery.
• Battery discharged 2. Raise and support rear of vehicle.
• Loose or faulty battery cables or corroded connections
3. Remove the RH rear wheel.
(see Chapter 11 – Voltage Drop Test, page 11.53)
• Related wiring loose, disconnected, or corroded 4. Remove nut q retaining the (+) positive wire to
• Poor ground connections at battery cable, starter starter motor terminal and remove the positive wire.
motor or starter solenoid (see Chapter 11 – Voltage
Drop Test, page 11.53) 5. From the RH side wheel well using an 8mm flex
• Faulty key switch socket, remove the negative battery cable nut w and
• Faulty starter solenoid or starter motor the two fasteners e securing the starter motor to the
• Engine problem - seized or binding (can engine be engine.
rotated easily)
Starter Motor Turns Over Slowly
• Battery discharged
• Excessive circuit resistance - poor connections (see
Chapter 11 – Voltage Drop Test, page 11.53)
• Engine problem - seized or binding (can engine be
rotated easily)
• Faulty or worn brushes in starter motor
NOTE
VOLTAGE DROP TEST
The (-) negative battery cable is mounted to the engine
The Voltage Drop Test is used to test for bad using the upper starter mounting bolt / stud.
connections. When performing the test, you are testing
the amount of voltage drop through the connection. A
poor or corroded connection will appear as a high 6. Remove the starter from the engine.
voltage reading. Voltage shown on the meter when
testing connections should not exceed 0.1 VDC per
connection or component.
To perform the test, place the meter on DC volts and
place the meter leads across the connection to be tested.
Refer to the voltage drop tests on the starter system in
this chapter.
11
NOTE
Tighten the lower starter bolt first, as the bottom hole
acts as a pilot hole to properly align the starter drive
(bendix) with the flywheel. This helps prevent binding
and starter damage.
TORQUE
Starter Mounting Bolts and Nut: STARTER SOLENOID OPERATION
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
To energize the Starter Solenoid the following must
occur:
• The brake must be applied to provide a ground path
via the Orange wire.
• The key switch must be turned to the “start” position to
provide 12V power via the Green / White wire.
• Once the pull-in coil is energized, the solenoid
provides a current path for 12V power to reach the
starter motor.
NOTE
To conserve battery power, the EPS unit will shut down
5 minutes after the engine has stopped if the key
remains in the ON position. At this point, the EPS
Malfunction Indicator Light will illuminate to indicate the
EPS has shut down and will set a fault code in Digital
Wrench®.
NOTE
DO NOT SPLICE OR CUT INTO THE CAN CIRCUITS.
WARNING
Electronic Power Steering (EPS) units are not 11
interchangeable between ATV and RANGER product
lines.
NOTE
See Chapter 5 ELECTRONIC POWER STEERING
ASSEMBLY, page for power steering unit removal
and installation procedures.
11
FUSES / RELAYS
FUSE BOX
RZR XP 1000 (NON-HIGH LIFTER)
WIRING HARNESS
MAIN HARNESS RETENTION LOCATIONS
Front
q Zip Tie Retention Locations The white tape on a harness signifies a retention point.
Rear
11
BREAK-OUT DIAGRAM VIEWING 4. Click on the box next to the breakout diagram you
Break-Out Diagrams want to see. Deselect any other diagram that may be
The main wiring diagram(s) maybe found in the back of selected.
the paper manual.
11
CAN SYSTEM
CAN SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The CAN system allows a large amount of information to
flow between components. The CAN system on this
vehicle will link the ECU, Diagnostic Connector,
Instrument Cluster/PIDD and EPS unit through a green
and a yellow wire.
A Brake Pads
Removal (Front) .....................................................9.14
A-Arm
Replacement (front) ................................................8.12
Brake Pedal IX
Installation ............................................................9.13
Air Box Removal...............................................................9.13
Assembly View ....................................................... 3.8 Brake System
Air Filter Assembly View ....................................................... 9.5
Assembly View ....................................................... 3.8 Brake Hose and Fitting Inspection..............................2.57
Intake Duct Drain ...................................................2.43 Troubleshooting .....................................................9.32
Pre-Filter Service ...................................................2.42 Brakes
Service ................................................................2.42 Bleeding / Fluid Change........................................... 9.11
Alignment Brake Burnishing Procedure .....................................9.25
Wheel ..................................................................2.53 Brakes Lock ..........................................................9.32
Authorization Hydraulic Brake System Operation.............................. 9.4
Reflash ................................................................4.61 Master Cylinder Installation ....................................... 9.9
AWD Master Cylinder Removal .......................................... 9.9
Diagnosis .............................................................7.28 Overheating ..........................................................9.32
Operation .............................................................7.28 Pedal Vibration ......................................................9.32
AWD/2WD Switch ................................................... 11.35 Performance Issues ................................................9.32
Special Tools .......................................................... 9.3
Troubleshooting Brake Noise ..................................... 9.4
B Break Even Test...................................................... 11.43
Break-In Period.......................................................... 2.4
Balance Shaft Break-Out
Installation ............................................................3.67 Wiring Diagrams ............................................. 11.67, 69
Removal / Inspection...............................................3.49
Ball Joint
Installation ............................................................8.15
Removal...............................................................8.15 C
Service ................................................................8.15 Cab Frame
Battery Assembly (XP 4) ....................................................10.4
Charging Procedure.............................................. 11.48 Assembly / Removal ...............................................10.3
Installation ............................................................2.59 Cam Chain Tensioner
Load Test ........................................................... 11.47 Inspection.............................................................2.34
Maintenance .........................................................2.58 Camshaft
Removal...............................................................2.58 Inspection (1000) ...................................................3.35
Specifications ...................................................... 11.46 Installation / Timing .................................................3.76
Storage .............................................................. 11.47 Removal...............................................................3.32
Tester ................................................................ 11.47 Sprocket Inspection ................................................3.34
Testing ............................................................... 11.47 Camshaft Timing - Quick Reference ..............................3.80
Beadlock Rims.................................................. 2.46, 7.38 CAN ..................................................................... 11.68
Bearing Carrier Cargo Box
Inspection / Removal (front) ....................................... 7.3 Removal............................................................. 10.23
Inspection / Removal (rear) ....................................... 7.6 Cargo Box) ............................................................ 10.18
Belt Inspection .................................................. 2.44, 5.14 Charging System
Belt Installation .........................................................5.14 Stator Tests......................................................... 11.43
Belt Removal............................................................5.13 Chassis........................................................ 10.12–10.13
Bleeding Chassis Harness
Cooling System......................................................3.15 Break-Out Diagrams ........................................ 11.67, 69
Block Switch........................................................... 11.37 Clutch
Brake Alarm ........................................................... 11.39 Starter One Way ....................................................3.72
Brake Burnishing.......................................................9.15 Troubleshooting .....................................................5.31
Brake Caliper Clutch Chart
Assembly (Front)....................................................9.19 RZR XP 1000 LE Gold Metallic................................... 5.3
Inspection (Front) ...................................................9.19 XP 1000 .................... 1.12, 1.20, 1.22, 1.24, 1.32, 1.34, 5.3
Installation (Front) ..................................................9.20 XP 1000 High Lifter.....................1.16, 1.18, 1.28, 1.30, 5.3
Removal (Front) .....................................................9.17 XP 4 1000........................................ 1.14, 1.26, 1.36, 5.3
Brake Fluid XP 4 1000 High Lifter ............................................... 5.3
Inspection.............................................................2.57 Combustion Chamber ................................................3.39
Brake Light Switch................................................... 11.34 Connecting Rod Assembly ..........................................3.63
Brake Line Connecting Rod Inspection..........................................3.57
Retention............................................................... 9.6 Connector................................................................ 11.7
Routing ................................................................. 9.6 Console
Brake Pad Removal.................................................... 10.24–10.25
Inspection.............................................................2.57 Continuity ................................................................ 11.8
Installation (Front) ..................................................9.15 Control Arm
Thickness .............................................................9.14 Replacement (front) ................................................8.12
D E
Dash ECT
Removal............................................................. 10.21 Test ................................................................... 11.51
Dash Instruments / Controls ........................................10.9 ECU ....................................................................... 4.11
Dash Light ............................................................. 11.50 ETC Learn Procedure .............................. 4.12, 4.41, 4.61
Decal Replacement ...................................................10.2 Replacement................................................. 4.11, 4.61
Decimal Equivalent Chart............................................1.39 EFI
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (ETC) ..................................4.46 Operation Overview ................................................. 4.7
Differential Service Notes ......................................................... 4.4
I O
Ignition Coil ............................................................ 11.42 O-rings
Replacement....................................................... 11.42 Fuel Injector ..........................................................4.13
Test ................................................................... 11.42 Oil Change
Injector Engine .................................................................2.30
O-rings.................................................................4.13 Oil Pressure Test........................................................ 3.4
Inspection Open Circuit Voltage Test .......................................... 11.47
Pre-Ride................................................................ 2.3 Oxygen Sensor .........................................................4.44
Instrument Cluster ................................................... 11.12 Replacement.........................................................4.44
Diagnostic Mode .................................................. 11.17
Information Display Area........................................ 11.14
Installation .......................................................... 11.18 P
Pinouts .............................................................. 11.18
Removal............................................................. 11.18 Parasitic ................................................................ 11.11
Intake Duct Pedal Position Sensor ................................................4.42
Draining ...............................................................2.43 Replacement.........................................................4.42
Intermittent .............................................................. 11.9 Testing .................................................................4.42
Periodic Maintenance
Overview ............................................................... 2.4
K Piston
Disassembly / Inspection (1000) ................................3.55
Key Switch............................................................. 11.35 Installation ............................................................3.64
Key-off Current Draw Test ......................................... 11.43 Removal...............................................................3.54
Keys Ring Groove Clearance ...........................................3.56
Replacement.......................................................... 1.3 Ring Installation .....................................................3.61
Ring Installed Gap (1000) ........................................3.57
Ring Removal / Inspection........................................3.56
L Piston to Cylinder Clearance........................................3.57
Plunging Joint / Boot
Leakdown Test .........................................................2.32 Replacement (Inner) ...............................................7.18
Lower Steering Shaft Polaris Mobile Digital Wrench (PMDW) ..........................4.64
Adjustment (WALKER EVANS™) ...................... 2.55, 8.28 Wheel and Hub ......................................................2.45
Stabilizer Bar Trailing Arm
Installation (front) ...................................................8.14 Spherical Bearing Replacement ................................8.19
Installation (rear) ....................................................8.21 Transmission
Removal (front) ......................................................8.13 Assembly .............................................................6.27
Removal (rear).......................................................8.21 Disassembly .........................................................6.14
Starter Gear / Shaft / Bearing Inspection ...............................6.26
Drive Installation ....................................................3.72 Installation ............................................................ 6.11
One-Way Clutch Assembly .......................................3.72 Lubrication............................................................2.48
One-Way Clutch Disassembly ...................................3.46 Lubrication Specifications ......................................... 6.2
One-Way Clutch Inspection ......................................3.45 Output Shaft Backlash Procedure ..............................6.27
Starter Motor Removal................................................................ 6.8
Installation .......................................................... 11.54 Snorkel Shaft Removal ............................................6.14
Removal............................................................. 11.53 Troubleshooting .....................................................6.33
Starter Solenoid Vent Line ...................................................... 2.51, 6.14
Operation ........................................................... 11.54 Transmission Lubrication ............................................. 6.2
Test ................................................................... 11.54 Transmission Switch ................................................ 11.36
Starter System Trouble Codes
Troubleshooting ................................................... 11.53 Instrument Cluster (DTC) .........................................4.46
Static ...................................................................... 11.6 Troubleshooting
Stator Brake Noise ........................................................... 9.4
Cover Installation ...................................................3.73 Brake System ........................................................9.32
Stator Cover.............................................................3.43 Clutch ..................................................................5.31
Stator Tests............................................................ 11.43 Cooling System......................................................3.86
Steering / Suspension Engine .................................................................3.85
Special Tools ................................................... 8.3, 10.2 EVAP System ........................................................4.10
Steering Shaft Fuel Injector ..........................................................4.14
Bearing Replacement.............................................. 8.11 Fuel System ..........................................................4.54
Steering System Misfire Detection ....................................................4.53
Inspection.............................................................2.52 Transmission Shifting Difficulty ..................................6.33
Steering Wheel Turn Lights............................................................. 11.38
Free-play..............................................................2.52 Turn/Lights/Horn Switch............................................ 11.37
Removal................................................................ 8.6
Suspension
Compression Adjustment (WALKER EVANS™) ............2.55 U
Rear – Assembly View.............................................8.20
Spring Adjustment (WALKER EVANS™) ............. 2.55, 8.28 Upper Steering Shaft
Switch Installation ............................................................8.10
AWD/2WD .......................................................... 11.35 Removal................................................................ 8.5
Brake Light ......................................................... 11.34
Hazard............................................................... 11.37
Headlamp........................................................... 11.34
Key ................................................................... 11.35
V
Seat Belt ............................................................ 11.36 Valve
Transmission....................................................... 11.36 Clearance Adjustment .............................................3.81
Turn/Lights/Horn .................................................. 11.37 Inspection.............................................................3.38
Sealing Test ..........................................................3.40
Seat Reconditioning (1000) ......................................3.40
T Valve Clearance
Valve Lash - Tappet Selection ...................................3.83
Taillight Valve Clearance - Tappet Selection ...............................3.83
Replacement....................................................... 11.50 Valve Clearance Inspection .........................................2.32
Tap / Drill Sizes {Metric} ..............................................1.38 Valve Cover
Tap / Drill Sizes {SAE} ................................................1.38 Removal...............................................................3.32
Testing .................................................... 11.6, 11.8–11.11 Valve Cover Installation ..............................................3.84
Thermostat Replacement ............................................3.12 Valve Spring
Throttle Body............................................................4.39 Removal...............................................................3.37
Throttle Pedal Vehicle Identification
Inspection.............................................................2.42 Model Number Designation ....................................... 1.2
Tie Rod End Inspection...............................................2.53 Vehicle Identification Number........................................ 1.2
Tire Vent Line
Inspection.............................................................2.46 Termination Fitting .......................................... 2.40, 4.22
Pressure ..............................................................2.46 VIN ......................................................................... 1.2
TMAP .....................................................................4.36 VIN Location ............................................................. 1.2
Toe Adjustment .........................................................2.54 Voltage Drop .......................................................... 11.11
Torque Specifications Voltage Drop Test .................................................... 11.53
Master .................................................................. 1.8 Voltage Regulator.................................................... 11.45
W
Water Pump
Housing Removal ...................................................3.44
IX
Installation ............................................................3.16
Removal...............................................................3.16
Service ................................................................3.18
Wheel
Installation ............................................................2.45
Removal...............................................................2.45
Wheel Alignment .......................................................2.53
Wheel Bearing
Replacement (front) ................................................. 7.4
Replacement (rear).................................................. 7.8
Wheel Hub
Assembly View (front) .............................................7.37
Assembly View (rear) ..............................................7.37
Wheel Toe Adjustment................................................2.54